JP7242400B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

A gaming machine has been proposed that executes a special zone effect related to the pending display when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2016-137126 A

In the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, there is a possibility that interest in the game may decrease after the special zone effect is completed.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with improved entertainment.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state after executing a variable display based on the establishment of a start condition and can display a specific display corresponding to the variable display,
a change effect executing means for changing a display mode of a specific display, which is a pre-reading announcement effect determined when a start condition is satisfied before the start condition is satisfied;
a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect that is the pre-reading preview effect;
a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect, which is the pre-reading preview effect,
When the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not being executed,
When the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the special effect is being executed,
It is easier to be controlled to the advantageous state when the special effect is executed than when the specific effect is executed,
The specific effect can be started after the special effect is started ,
The display mode of the specific display whose display mode is changed to the predetermined mode when the specific effect is executed is more likely to change than the specific display whose display mode is changed to the predetermined mode when the specific effect is not performed. ,
It is characterized by
Furthermore, (1) in order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., pending display, active display) corresponding to a variable display, and controllable to an advantageous state for a player,
A change effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, step 57AKS010) for effect control CPU 120 that changes the display mode of the specific display,
Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing processing of steps 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, zone effect of display change high probability zone),
When the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not being executed,
The specific display whose display mode changes to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is executed is more likely to change in display mode than the specific display whose display mode changes to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is not executed ( For example, in the processing of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of times the display mode of the specific display changes),
moreover,
A setting means (for example, a game control microcomputer that executes a set value change process in step S6A) that can be set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) that have different advantages for the player 100 CPU 103, etc.);
Effect execution means (for example, image display device 5, effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing suggestive effect over a specific period,
The effect execution means continues to suggest control of the advantageous state as an effect that can be executed after the specific timing after suggesting the control of the advantageous state until a specific timing in the specific period. Any one of a first suggesting effect and a second suggesting effect of continuously suggesting the control of the advantageous state and suggesting the setting of the setting means can be executed (for example, FIG. 12 -12).
According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved. Further, by enabling execution of either the first suggesting effect or the second suggesting effect after the specific timing, the game interest can be improved.

(2) Alternatively, in order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., pending display, active display) corresponding to a variable display, and controllable to an advantageous state for a player,
A change effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, step 57AKS010) for effect control CPU 120 that changes the display mode of the specific display,
Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing processing of steps 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, zone effect of display change high probability zone),
When the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not being executed,
The specific display whose display mode changes to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is executed is more likely to change in display mode than the specific display whose display mode changes to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is not executed ( For example, in the processing of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of times the display mode of the specific display changes),
moreover,
A setting means (for example, a game control microcomputer that executes a set value change process in step S6A) that can be set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) that have different advantages for the player 100 CPU 103, etc.);
Effect execution means (for example, image display device 5, effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing suggestive effect over a specific period,
The effect execution means provides a first suggestion effect in which the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state is made until a specific timing in the specific period, and then the suggestion ends, and after the specific timing, the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state is provided. It is possible to execute any of the second suggestive effects that are performed continuously and suggest the settings of the setting means (see FIGS. 12-13, for example).
According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved. In addition, by making it possible to execute either the first suggesting performance in which the suggestion is made until the specific timing and ends, or the second suggestive performance in which the suggestion is made even after the specific timing, the amusement of the game can be improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
When the specific effect is being executed and when the specific effect is not being executed, a change suggestive effect (for example, a star shown in FIG. image 57AK004 acting on the specific display) may be executed at different rates (for example, the change suggestive effect is executed only in the display change high probability zone).
According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
Even after the end of the specific effect, the specific display whose display mode changed while the specific effect was being executed is more displayed than the specific display whose display mode was not changed while the specific effect was being executed. The mode is likely to change (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of times the display mode of the specific display changes).
According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
Special effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS011) that can execute a special effect different from the specific effect (for example, zone effect of chance zone).
The display mode of the specific display may change more easily when the specific effect is being executed than when the special effect is being executed.
According to such a configuration, the presentation becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
Special effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS011) that can execute a special effect different from the specific effect (for example, zone effect of chance zone).
When the special performance is executed, the ratio of control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher than when the specific performance is executed,
It may be possible to shift from the specific effect to the special effect (for example, see FIG. 10-7).
According to such a configuration, the presentation becomes diverse and the interest is enhanced.

In addition, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions relating to gaming machines of the following (7) to (13). 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among game machines, there has been a pachinko game machine capable of setting setting values, such as that disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, which executes an effect of suggesting setting values. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the effect that suggests the set value is not related to other effects, and there is a risk that it will be difficult to improve the game interest. There is a demand for the provision of gaming machines that make it possible.

(7) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and has a plurality of set values (for example, 1 6, etc.) can be set to any set value (for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the set value change process in step S6A), and a suggestive effect can be executed over a specific period Effect execution means (for example, image display device 5, effect control CPU 120, etc.), and the effect execution means makes a suggestion regarding control of the advantageous state until a specific timing in the specific period, and then the specific timing. As effects that can be executed thereafter, a first suggestion effect in which the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state is continuously performed, and a suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state is continuously performed and a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is performed. Any one of the two suggestive effects can be executed (for example, see FIGS. 12-12).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game by enabling execution of either the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect after the specific timing.

(8) Alternatively, a gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that is controllable to an advantageous state (eg, jackpot gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, and has a plurality of set values ( For example, 1 to 6, etc.) can be set to any set value (for example, CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the set value change process in step S6A), and a suggestive effect over a specific period An executable effect execution means (for example, the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120, etc.) is provided, and the effect execution means makes a suggestion regarding control of the advantageous state until a specific timing in the specific period. and a second suggestion effect of continuing to suggest the control of the advantageous state after the specific timing and suggesting the setting of the setting means. (see, eg, FIGS. 12-13).
According to such a configuration, by making it possible to execute either the first suggestion performance in which the suggestion is made until the specific timing and then ends, or the second suggestion performance in which the suggestion is made even after the specific timing, the amusement of the game can be improved. can be done.

(9) In the gaming machine of (7) above, the specific period may be included in at least a variable display execution period (for example, a period after timing T2) in which a ready-to-win effect can be executed.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by increasing the degree of attention to the presentation.

(10) In the gaming machine of (7) or (9) above, the variable display reach mode includes a plurality of types of reach modes (for example, 1 to 7 reach symbols, etc.) with different ratios of control to the advantageous state. The effect executing means may be capable of changing the ready-to-win mode to a specific mode (for example, the symbol display color is copper, silver, gold, etc.) after the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by increasing the degree of attention to the presentation.

(11) In the gaming machine of (7), (9) or (10) above, after the specific timing, the effect executing means performs a different mode of effect (for example, a setting suggesting pattern) according to the setting of the setting means. Effect according to patterns RE-0 to RE-3, etc.) may be executable.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by increasing the degree of attention to the presentation.

(12) In the gaming machine of (8) above, the effect execution means changes the effect mode step by step from one stage to a plurality of stages, and as the number of stages in which the effect mode is changed increases, the advantageous state is obtained. It may be possible to execute a suggestive effect (for example, a step-up advance notice effect, etc.) in which the rate of control is increased.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by increasing the degree of attention to the presentation.

(13) In the gaming machine of (12) above, the plurality of stages include an advantageous state notification stage (e.g., a fourth step of a step-up notice effect, etc.) for notifying that the control is to be in the advantageous state, and the setting means. setting suggestion step (for example, the fifth step of the step-up notice effect, etc.) for suggesting the setting of the effect execution means, after changing the effect mode to the advantageous state notification step, after the specific timing At , it is possible to change the presentation mode to the setting suggestion stage, and the setting suggestion stage may have a longer execution period than the advantageous state notification stage (see, for example, FIGS. 12-11).
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by increasing the degree of attention to the presentation.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in a state in which the gaming machine frame is opened. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in characterizing part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in characterizing part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in characterizing part 112IW. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing processing executed when power is turned on; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a display monitor in setting change processing; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of the execution ratio, appearance rate, and reliability of the notice X of the characteristic portion 53AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of another execution ratio, appearance rate, and reliability of the notice X of the characteristic portion 53AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of an execution rate and an appearance rate of the notice Y of the characteristic portion 53AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an execution ratio and an appearance ratio of the advance notice Z of the characteristic portion 53AK; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of characteristic part 53AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of characteristic part 57AK. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing specific display processing of a characteristic portion 57AK; FIG. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in specific display processing. It is a figure which shows the change timing of the display mode of a specific display. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display change pattern of a specific display of characteristic portion 57AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing transition ratios of zones; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of the modification of characteristic part 57AK. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing in game control main processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of stop design decision processing. It is a figure which shows the setting example regarding a ready-to-win pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting example regarding a setting suggestion effect execution determination table; FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing setting suggestion patterns and the like; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of an advance notice effect determination process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a setting example regarding an advance notice type determination table; FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a step number pattern and the like; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an outer frame display pattern and the like; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; It is a figure which shows the execution period and execution timing of various production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the execution example of setting suggestion production|presentation using a ready-to-win pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution example of a step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation pattern of a chance up production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation pattern determination ratio of a chance up production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect pattern of setting value suggestion effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect pattern determination ratio of a set value suggesting effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing executable periods of the chance-up effect and the setting value suggestion effect;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is ended.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 112IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 112IW will be described. The pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 112IW is changeable in setting. In the pachinko game machine 1 whose settings can be changed, any one of a plurality of setting values can be set, and control is possible to achieve an advantageous state (jackpot game state) at different rates according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of other characteristic portions may be configured so that the setting can be changed in the same manner as the characteristic portion 112IW. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 112IW001a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame, and a game board constituting a game board surface. (gauge board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 112IW003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Also, in the game machine frame 112IW003, a glass door frame 112IW003a having a glass window is positioned between a door open position where the front face of the game machine frame 112IW003 is opened and a door closed position where the front face is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 112IW003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 112IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into the lock to unlock it. 112IW003a cannot be released.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 112IW201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. Further, on the main board 11, a setting key 112IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which will be described later, and a setting key 112IW051 for changing set values such as a winning probability of a big hit (ball output rate), etc., to be described later in the setting change state. A setting switch 112IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

A setting-switching main body provided with operation units that can be operated by the player, such as the setting keys 112IW051 and the setting-switching switches 112IW052, is accommodated in the board case 112IW201 together with the main board 11. The setting keys 112IW051 and the setting-switching switches 112IW052 are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear right portion of the substrate case 112IW201 so that operation can be performed without opening the substrate case 112IW201.

Since the substrate case 112IW201 having the setting keys 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is impossible to operate from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. It is possible to operate by opening the gaming machine frame 112IW003 using a predetermined door key. Also, since the setting key 112IW051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like of the game arcade, only the store clerk possessing the setting key can operate it. The setting key 112IW051 is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF, which will be described later. In this characterizing portion 112IW, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may also be used.

A display monitor 112IW029 and a display changeover switch 112IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 112IW029 are arranged in the substrate case 112IW201. The display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged at the upper left part of the board case 112IW201. In other words, the display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 112IW201. Since the main board 11 cannot be viewed when the game machine frame 112IW003 is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 112IW003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the characteristic portion 112IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 112IW003 is closed. There is a possibility that the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 are operated from inside the game island where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in this characteristic part 112IW, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, a board including a setting key 112IW051 and a setting changeover switch 112IW052 is provided at the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. A security cover 112IW500A is attached to cover the right side of the case 112IW201 from the rear side. This security cover 112IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member comprising a short piece 112IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 112IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 112IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko game machine 1, It is composed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 112IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 112IW201. Security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the right end of outer frame 112IW001a via the front end of short piece 112IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, the long piece 112IW500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right portion of the board case 112IW201 from behind the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. Thus, the right side of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 . Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 are inoperable by the long piece 112IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-3, in the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 move together with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 to move from the long piece 112IW500Ab. Separation releases the covering state of the long piece 112IW500Ab, so that it becomes operable.

In other words, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 112IW, when the game machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500A regulates the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the restriction state by the security cover 112IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is permitted. state.

Since the substrate case 112IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting keys 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 when the game machine frame 112IW003 is closed. Unless the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened by a game arcade clerk or the like using the door key, the setting values cannot be changed by operating the setting keys 112IW051 and the setting changeover switches 112IW052.

However, in a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a game island (not shown) of the gaming hall, even if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, for example, other pachinko gaming machines adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 A setting key 112IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set by inserting an illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate from between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a game device such as a card unit or the like installed between the spacer member and the pachinko gaming machine 1. or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 to change the set value. By maintaining the restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 112IW052 is restricted, the fraudulent act can be suitably suppressed.

Further, even in a regulated state in which the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed and the security cover 112IW500A covers the right rear side of the board case 112IW201 including the setting keys 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052, the board can be opened through the transparent security cover 112IW500A. Since the main board 11 and the like accommodated in the case 112IW201 can be seen through, the mounting surface of the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted and the status of sealing seals can be easily confirmed.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

In this characteristic part 112IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data representing the random number MR4 of , and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables such as the determination table shown in FIG. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in the variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 8-4(A), a display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. - In addition to the display result determination table (set value 3) shown in -4 (C), the big hit type determination table (not shown), the big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), the losing variation pattern determination table (not shown), the normal figure A display result determination table (not shown), a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 112IW is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of three levels from 1 to 3, where 1 is the lowest ball payout rate, and the higher the value is in the order of 1, 2, and 3, the higher the ball payout rate is. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the lowest, and the advantage increases stepwise as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3.

(Display result determination table)
FIGS. 8-4A to 8-4C are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each case where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display In this case, a jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at non-probability variation, 1/32 at probability variation) than when the set value is "2" or "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is subject to variable display, the probability of winning a big hit is the same as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/320 when non-variable, 1/32 when variable). do.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1" Winning a big hit with a higher probability than in some cases (1/300 when non-variable, 1/30 when variable). Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is subject to variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/300 when non-variable, 1/30 when variable) wins the jackpot do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", Winning a jackpot with a higher probability (1/280 at non-probability variation, 1/28 at probability variation) than in the case of "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is subject to variable display, the probability of winning a big hit is the same as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/280 when non-variable, 1/28 when variable). do.

In other words, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any one of the big hits shown in FIGS. If it matches with the hit determination value, it is determined to be a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C) with respect to the special symbol. That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-4(A) to (C) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic part 112IW, a total of three setting values 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 112IW, the larger the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player is (the probability of a big hit increases), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

(Display monitor 112IW029)
In this characteristic part 112IW, in the pachinko machine 1, the number of game balls entering each winning hole (big winning hole, second big winning hole, first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole, general winning hole) It is possible to calculate various types of winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases based on the aggregation.

Specifically, the display monitor 112IW029 has a four-digit display. The display portion of each digit is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments each drawing a figure of "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments.

Display contents are displayed on the first and second digit display portions, and numerical values are displayed in percentage on the third and fourth digit display portions. Display No. 1 displays a short-term continuous ratio, and display No. 2 displays a short-term role ratio. In display No. 3, the total cumulative consecutive ratio is displayed, and in display No. 4, the total cumulative role ratio is displayed. Display No. 5 displays the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls, and display No. 6 displays the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls. be done.

The short term here means a period during which the number of awarded balls (the number of won balls) was 6000. The period for calculating the total sum means the total period from when the calculation of the continuous ratio and the role ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the role ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the game state, but they may be calculated in consideration of the game state. For example, the consecutive ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls accounted for by the number of prize balls entered into the big prize opening during the jackpot game state. In addition, the role ratio is defined as the ratio of the number of prize balls entering the second starting prize opening during the high base state and the number of prize balls entering the large prize opening during the big win game state to the total number of prize balls. good too. Also, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term consecutive ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." "y7." is displayed on the first digit display portion and the second digit display portion. Further, when the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) in the third-digit display section and the fourth-digit display section, and the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. is displayed, the short-term role ratio is displayed in percentage (%) on the third and fourth digit display portions.

When the total cumulative winning ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." , "A7." is displayed on the first and second digit display portions. Further, when the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) in the third-digit display section and the fourth-digit display section, and the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. When the cumulative role ratio is displayed, the total cumulative role ratio is displayed in percentage (percentage display) in the display portion of the third digit and the display portion of the fourth digit.

When base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." "B6." In addition, when base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) in the third and fourth digit display parts, and base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. When displayed, the total cumulative winning ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the third digit display section and the fourth digit display section.

Furthermore, the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1, and base 2 are displayed based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030 for the set value set at that time. Short-term consecutive ratio, short-term consecutive ratio, total accumulated consecutive ratio, total accumulated consecutive ratio, base 1, base 2 display can be sequentially changed.

In addition, in this characterizing section 112IW, the display monitor 112IW029 exemplifies a mode in which the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base at each setting value can be displayed. The monitor 112IW029 may be able to display only one numerical value or only any two numerical values among these continuous ratio, role ratio, and base.

In addition, in this characteristic part 112IW, a form in which the consecutive ratio, the role ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, is calculated and displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 112IW029 may display the history of the number of awarded balls without calculating the consecutive ratio, the role ratio, and the base. good.

(setting change processing)
Next, the change of the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 in this characterizing part 112IW will be described. Figures 8-5 and 8-7 are flowcharts showing the game control main process in the characterizing section 112IW. In this characteristic portion 112IW, the processing of steps 112IWS001-S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1-S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 waits for the activation of the effect control means for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A timer is set (step 112IWS003). In this case, sufficient time is set to the effect control means startup waiting timer from when the power supply to the gaming machine is started until the effect control CPU 120 is activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 112IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 112IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, it returns to step 112IWS004 and repeats the processing of steps 112IWS004 to S005. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 112IWS006.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS003 to S005, after waiting until the effect control CPU 120 is started, the processing after step 112IWS006 is executed, and the change and confirmation of the set value, the initialization of the RAM, the restoration processing, etc. are executed. be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a set value command, an initialization command, a command for recovery, and the like, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and a command can be omitted. can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting value is the factory default value (for example, a value other than "0" or a possible setting value) (step 112IWS006). If the factory settings remain unchanged (step 112IWS006; Yes), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

If the settings are not factory default (step 112IWS006; No), that is, if the setting values have already been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up the data to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by performing the same processing as in step S4. It is determined whether or not data is saved (step 112IWS007). Specifically, at step 112IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) in the same manner as in step S5 to determine whether the data is normal. (Step 112IWS008). At step 112IWS008, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 112IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 112IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 checks whether or not a setting changing flag indicating that the setting value is currently being changed is set (step 112IWS009). ). If the setting changing flag is set (step 112IWS009; Yes), that is, if the power supply to the game machine is restarted due to a power failure or the like during the change of the setting value, the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

At step 112IWS010, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 112IWS010). Note that the CPU 103 may perform control to display a display (for example, display of "E") indicating a RAM abnormality error on the display monitor 112IW029.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is ON (the door (game machine frame 112IW003) is open) (step 112IWS011). If the output signal from door open sensor 112IW090 is ON, CPU 103 determines whether setting key 112IW051 is ON (step 112IWS012). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 120AKSA01). When the RAM clear flag is ON, RAM clear processing for clearing the contents stored in the RAM 102 is executed after the processing related to setting change is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step 120AKSA03.

On the other hand, if the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is off (the door is closed) (N at step 112IWS011) or if the setting key 112IW051 is off (N at step 112IWS012), is off (N in step 112IWS013), the process does not proceed to step 120AKSA01, but proceeds to loop processing. In addition, before entering the loop processing, the control (processing of step 112IWS010) of transmitting the RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 may be executed.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS006 to S013, in this characteristic part 112IW, if the backup RAM is not normal (steps 112IWS007, N of S008), or if the settings for factory shipment remain unchanged (step 112IWS006 Y), if a power failure or the like occurs during the setting change (step 112IWS009 Y), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 opened. On this condition, the setting values after step 120AKSA03 can be changed, and then the RAM is cleared. On the other hand, unless the game machine frame 112IW003 is opened and the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, setting values cannot be changed, and game control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 112IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015).

If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 120AKSA02).

After the processing of step 120AKSA02 or if the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS016). If the output signal from door open sensor 112IW090 is on, CPU 103 determines whether setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS017).

If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA03). Here, when the setting key 112IW051 is on, depending on the state of the RAM clear flag (that is, ON/OFF of the clear switch), processing for confirming the setting (setting confirmation processing) or processing for changing the setting (setting change) is performed. process). It should be noted that error processing may be executed when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is turned off during setting change or setting confirmation.

When the RAM clear flag is ON (step 120AKSA03; Yes), a setting change start command indicating to start the setting change process is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA04). Moreover, when the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA03; No), a setting confirmation start command indicating to start the setting confirmation process is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA05).

On the effect control board 12 side, when the setting change command or the setting confirmation command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, A predetermined sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a decorative light-emitting body such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value is the factory-shipped value (for example, "0") (step 120AKSA06). If it is the setting value at the time of shipment from the factory (step 120AKSA06; Yes), the setting value is set to "1" (step 120AKSA07). At step 120AKSA07, the set value stored in the backup area of RAM 102 is updated to "1".

At step 120AKSA07, if the setting value is the value at the time of shipment from the factory, the setting value is set to "1" as the initial value, but other setting values may be used as the initial value. The set value is also set to the initial value "1" when there is a RAM abnormality error such as when the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 or when the backup data is not normal (for example, when the processing of step 112IWS010 is executed). You may make it In this case, when the processing of step 112IWS010 is executed (step 112IWS006; Yes, step 112IWS007; No, or step 112IWS008; No), the RAM abnormality flag is set, and in step 120AKSA06, the RAM abnormality flag is on or not.

If the set values are not factory-set values (step 120AKSA06; No), or after executing the process of step 120AKSA07, the CPU 103 displays the set values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 120AKSA08 ).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is ON (step 120AKSA09). If the RAM clear flag is ON (step 120AKSA09; Yes), the setting changing flag is set (step 120AKSA10).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the setting switch 112IW052 is on (step 120AKSA11). If the output signal from the setting switch 112IW052 is ON (step 120AKSA11; Yes), the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is updated (step 120AKSA12). The setting value is updated each time the setting switch 112IW052 is operated (pressed). For example, if the setting value is "1", it is updated to "2", if the setting value is "2", it is updated to "3", and if the setting value is "3", it is updated to "1". You should update. Note that a specific set value may be specified by operating the setting switch 112IW052.

If the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA09; No), it means that the setting has been confirmed, so the process for changing the setting is not executed. In this case, or if the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is not ON (step 120AKSA11; No), after executing the processing of step 120AKSA12, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is OFF. (Step 120AKSA13).

If the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 remains on (step 120AKSA13; No), the process returns to step 120AKSA08 to continue setting confirmation processing or setting change processing. When the setting value is updated in step 120AKSA12, the setting value after updating is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 by executing the process of step 120AKSA08 again.

If the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is off (step 120AKSA13; Yes), it is determined whether or not the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA14). If the RAM clear flag is ON (step 120AKSA14; Yes), reset the setting changing flag (step 120AKSA15), and send a setting change end command indicating that the setting change is completed to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA16 ).

When the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA14; No), a setting confirmation end command indicating that the setting confirmation is completed is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA17).

After that, the display of the set value on the display monitor 112IW029 is erased (step 120AKSA18), and a set value command indicating the set value is sent to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS031). Note that the setting value command may be transmitted only when the setting value is updated.

Next, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear flag is ON (step 120AKSA19). If the RAM clear flag is ON (step 120AKSA19; Yes), RAM clear processing is executed (step 120AKSA20). In the RAM clear processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clearing process, among the storage areas of the RAM 102, the area other than the area for storing performance display information such as continuous ratio, role ratio, and base and the area for storing setting values is cleared. Performance display information such as ratio and base, and set value information are retained without being cleared.

After that, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 by the same processing as in step S9 (step 112IWS033).

If the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA19; No), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step 112IWS022) for returning the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped by the same processing as in step S6. conduct. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 by the process similar to step S7 (step 112IWS023).

After the process of step 112IWS033 or step 112IWS023, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034. The processing of steps 112IWS034-S036 is the same as the processing of steps S10-S12 shown in FIG.

The set values may be displayed on the image display device 5 at step 120AKSA08. Then, subsequent processing may be executed using the image display device 5 .

Also, during execution of the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are set to a mode in which they are not displayed during the normal game (for example, a mode in which all segments of the 7-segment LED are lit or blinked). good too. By notifying using the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B in this way, it is possible to suitably notify the player of the setting confirmation state or the setting change state. It should be noted that the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B may have different modes during the setting confirmation state and the setting change state.

If the power is turned off during execution of the setting change process, the setting change process is executed again and the updated setting values are stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM), unless the setting change is completed. , may be regarded as an error. Specifically, at the start of the setting change process, a setting change flag (not erased even if the RAM is cleared) is stored in the same backup RAM as the backup RAM that stores the setting value, and at the end of the setting change process, the setting change flag is stored. If the setting change flag is ON when the flag is turned off and a process other than the setting change process (for example, game control main process) is executed, an error is assumed. As described above, in a situation where the setting change process does not proceed normally, the game arcade clerk may misunderstand that the setting change has been completed even though it has not been completed. In such a case, if the setting change is not completed, an error will occur, so that the setting change can be reliably completed.

Also, at step 120AKSA08, the current set value is read out from the backup RAM, and the set value is displayed. However, when the backup to the backup RAM is not performed normally, information indicating an error is displayed on the image display device 5, and the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are displayed in a mode different from that during the normal game. (For example, all segments of the 7-segment LED may be extinguished, or if all segments are lit during setting confirmation processing and setting change processing, all segments may be blinked).

FIG. 8-8 is an explanatory diagram showing the processing executed when the power is turned on. In this characteristic part 112IW, as shown in FIG. 8-8, when the setting key 112IW051 is on when the power is turned on (and when the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, setting change processing (steps 120AKSA08 to 120AKSA13, etc.) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, setting confirmation processing (steps 120AKSA08, 120AKSA13, etc.) is executed. If the setting key 112IW051 is off when the power is turned on, initialization processing (step 120AKSA20, etc.) is executed if the clear switch is on, and recovery processing (step 112IWS024) if the clear switch is off. is executed.

In this embodiment, in the game control main processing shown in FIGS. 8-5 to 8-7, while making some processing common, branching according to the state of the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch (RAM clear flag) , the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, the initialization process, or the recovery process are executed, but each of them may be modularized and executed as individual processes.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-9 (A) and 8-9 (B), when the power is turned off (powered off) by the operation of a game hall clerk or the like, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped. The display on the display monitor 112IW029 ends when the supply stops. When the power is turned off and the large winning opening is open during a jackpot game or the like, power supply to the solenoid 82 is stopped and the large winning opening is closed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-9(C), when the game arcade clerk or the like turns on the power while operating the clear switch (if Yes in step S3 of the game control main processing), the setting key 112IW051 is turned ON. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that it is, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

In this state where the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 112IW029, as shown in FIG. Numerical values displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 are sequentially updated (for example, updated in the order of 1→2→3→1→ . . . each time the setting switch 112IW052 is operated).

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-9(E), the CPU 103 stores the set values displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 112IW051 has been turned off by the operation of the game arcade clerk or the like. stored (updated) in the backup area of At this time, the CPU 103 displays on the display monitor 112IW029, based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term consecutive ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, Display base 1 and base 2. Also, RAM
If pending storage is stored in the backup area 102, the pending storage is cleared. Also, when the big winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 8-9 (A) (the timing when the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off), RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory related to the big win is erased, the big prize opening remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 ends the setting change processing, and enters a state in which a game can be performed, that is, a state in which a variation display result, a jackpot type, a lottery for determination of a variation pattern, payout of prize balls, and the like can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-9(F), the CPU 103 displays "E.E.E.E." It is possible to

In addition, in the setting change processing in this characterizing portion 112IW, as an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029, a mode of displaying the setting values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. As an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process, the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (“1” in the case of this characteristic portion 112IW) or the most advantageous setting value for the player. A set value (“3” for the characteristic portion 112IW) may be displayed.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 53AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 53AK will be described. The pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 53AK is changeable in setting. In the pachinko game machine 1 whose settings can be changed, any one of a plurality of setting values can be set, and control is possible to achieve an advantageous state (jackpot game state) at different rates according to the set value. In the characteristic portion 53AK, it is possible to execute a notice effect for notifying/suggesting that the display result will be a big win (that the game will be controlled to a big win game state) during execution of the variable display.

Whether or not the advance notice effect is executed is determined depending on whether or not the display result is a big hit in the variable display start setting process of step S171 shown in FIG. 7 when the variable display is started. In the pachinko game machine 1 whose setting can be changed, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning a big hit. Notice effects (especially highly reliable notice effects that will result in a big hit) are easier to execute when the display result is a big hit. The higher the value, the higher the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect. In this embodiment, the reliability means the reliability of the big win, and means the ratio of the big win when the announcement effect is executed.

Therefore, there is a possibility that the occurrence rate or reliability of the announcement effect may differ from what is intended due to fluctuations due to the set values, or the reliability may change, which may confuse the player. In the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 53AK, by adjusting (changing) the execution ratio of the notice effect according to the setting value, at least one of the appearance rate of the notice effect and the reliability is set to the same or substantially the same range. adjusted within. As a result, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect can be set as intended, and the player can be prevented from being confused by the notice effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent setting values from being unreasonably suggested depending on the execution frequency of the advance notice effect.

It should be noted that, when adjusting the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect, it may be difficult to completely match the ratio after the decimal point. Therefore, the invention relating to the characteristic portion 53AK includes not only the appearance rate and the reliability of the advance notice effect that are the same, but also those that are adjusted within substantially the same range. It should be noted that the same effect as in the case of being the same can be obtained as long as they are within substantially the same range. The term “substantially the same range” may be within a predetermined range, such as within a predetermined error range (for example, plus or minus 5%, etc.), or the appearance rate or reliability of the advance notice effect as perceived by the player. may be within substantially the same range such that they are felt to be the same.

FIG. 9-1 is a diagram showing an example of the execution ratio, appearance rate, and reliability of the announcement X as the announcement effect of the characteristic portion 53AK. FIG. 9-1(A) shows an example in which the appearance rate and reliability of advance notice X are not adjusted. In this embodiment, three levels of "1" to "3" are provided as set values. As shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), in this embodiment, the jackpot probability a is "1/300" for the set value "1", "1/250" for the set value "2", and the set value In the case of "3", it is "1/200". The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of the big hit is "50/100" regardless of the set value. Therefore, the ratio of execution of the notice X to the big hit (percentage of the total variation) A (= jackpot probability a x execution ratio b) is ``1/600'' when the setting value is ``1'', and the setting value is ``2''. is "1/500" in the case of , and "1/400" in the case of the set value "3".

In addition, the probability of losing c (= 1-jackpot probability a) is "299/300" when the setting value is "1", "249/250" when the setting value is "2", and "199" when the setting value is "3". /200”. The execution ratio d of the advance notice X at the time of losing is "1/100". Therefore, the ratio (percentage of all variations) B (=probability of failure c×execution ratio d) at which the advance notice X is executed and becomes a failure is approximately “1/100” at any set value.

The appearance rate C (=A+B) of the notice X in all fluctuations is "7/600" when the setting value is "1", "6/500" when the setting value is "2", and "5" when the setting value is "3". /400”. In addition, the reliability D (=A/C) of the notice X is "1/7" (approximately 14%) for the set value "1" and "1/6" (approximately 17%) for the set value "2". ), and when the set value is "3", it is "1/5" (20%).

In this way, when the execution ratio of the announcement effect (notice X) is the same regardless of the setting value and without adjustment, the higher the set value, the higher the appearance rate and reliability of the announcement effect. In particular, when the reliability is based on the set value "2", an error of about plus or minus 3% occurs.

FIG. 9-1(B) shows an example in which the appearance rate and reliability of advance notice X are adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 9-1(B), unlike the example shown in FIG. When the set value is "2", it is "50/100", and when the set value is "3", it is "40/100". In addition, the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of failure is "3/299" for the setting value "1", "2.5/249" for the setting value "2", and "2" for the setting value "3". /199”.

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the notice X in all fluctuations is "6/500" regardless of the set value. Also, the reliability D of the advance notice X is "1/6" regardless of the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate and reliability of the announcement effect from changing according to the set value, resulting in an unintended ratio, and to suitably execute the announcement effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the announcement effect.

In this embodiment, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice X as the notice effect are adjusted to be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values. Such adjustments are made for highly reliable notice effects and special notice effects that are featured (that is, some notice effects), and for other notice effects, without adjusting the execution ratio, depending on the set value The appearance rate and reliability may be changed. That is, the other notice effects may be executed at the same execution ratio regardless of the set value. By doing this, compared to the case where the appearance rate and reliability are adjusted for all the notice effects, the burden of adjusting the appearance rate and reliability is generated, and the processing burden of deciding whether or not to execute the notice effects. increase can be prevented.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-1(B), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of failure is different, but even if it is the same as shown in FIG. 9-1(A), the notice X The rate B of execution and failure is approximately the same "1/100" regardless of the setting value, and the appearance rate C of the notice X is also approximately the same (approximately 1.17% to 1.25%). , the execution ratio d of the advance notice X at the time of failure may be the same regardless of the set value.

In this case, by adjusting only the execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of the big win, the appearance rate C and the reliability D of the notice X can be made within the same or substantially the same range. In this way, by sharing the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of loss, which accounts for most of all fluctuations, there is no need to determine the set value for each change of loss and make the execution ratio different, so the notice effect can reduce the control burden for executing

FIG. 9-1(C) shows an example in which the rate of appearance of notice X is adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (C), unlike the example shown in FIG. ”, “2/249” for the set value “2”, and “1.5/199” for the set value “3”. The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of the big hit remains "50/100" regardless of the set value.

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the notice X in all fluctuations is "1/100" regardless of the set value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the execution frequency of the notice effect, and from suggesting the set value unnecessarily. In addition, it is possible to make the occupancy rate of the advance notice X in the case of a big win common, and to maintain a suitable rate of appearance at the time of the big win.

In this case, the appearance rate C of the notice X is common regardless of the setting value, but as shown in FIG. Become. By doing so, it is possible to provide playability according to the set value. In addition, as the number of appearances of the notice X increases, the reliability can be estimated, and the set value can be estimated. Incidentally, by matching the appearance rate, the reliability corresponding to the set value may change relatively greatly (about plus or minus 10%), such as 30% to 50%. This makes it easier to guess the set value.

FIG. 9-1(D) shows an example in which the reliability of the notice X is adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (D), unlike the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of failure is 2.5/299 when the set value is 1. ”, “2.5/249” for the set value “2”, and “2.5/199” for the set value “3”. The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of the big hit remains "50/100" regardless of the set value.

By doing so, the reliability D of the notice X becomes "1/6" regardless of the set value. By doing so, the same reliability can be notified by the notice X regardless of the set value. In addition, it is possible to make the occupancy rate of the advance notice X in the case of a big win common, and to maintain a suitable rate of appearance at the time of the big win.

In this case, the reliability D of the notice X is common regardless of the set value, but as shown in FIG. Become. By doing so, it is possible to provide playability according to the set value. In addition, as the number of appearances of the notice X increases, the set value can be estimated, so an improvement in the operation rate of the pachinko game machine 1 can be expected.

In addition, in FIG. 9-1 (D), by varying the execution ratio of the notice X at the time of failure according to the set value, the reliability of the notice X was adjusted to be the same regardless of the set value. However, by making the execution ratio of the notice X at the time of losing the same regardless of the set value, and by varying the execution ratio of the notice X at the time of the big hit according to the set value, the reliability of the notice X is the same regardless of the set value. It may be adjusted so that In this way, by sharing the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of loss, which accounts for most of all fluctuations, there is no need to determine the set value for each change of loss and make the execution ratio different, so the notice effect can reduce the control burden for executing

The jackpot probability a shown in FIGS. 9-1(A) to 9-1(D) and the adjustment examples of the advance notice execution ratios b and d are just examples. In order to make at least one of the appearance rate C and the reliability D the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set values, it is necessary to make the appearance rate C and the reliability D the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set values. Moreover, at least one of the notice execution ratios b and d should be changed according to the set value. That is, when the appearance rate C is set to be the same (substantially the same), the execution rate of the notice is adjusted so that the appearance rate C=a×b+(1−a)×d is the same (substantially the same) regardless of the setting value. At least one of b and d should be adjusted. In addition, when the reliability D of the announcement effect is set to be the same (substantially the same), the reliability D of the announcement effect is equal (a×b)/(a×b+(1−a)×d) regardless of the setting value. At least one of the advance notice execution ratios b and d may be adjusted so that the same (substantially the same) are obtained.

In the execution ratio shown in Fig. 9-1, the execution ratio according to the jackpot type was not considered, but if there are multiple jackpot types, the execution ratio of the notice effect (notice X) according to the jackpot type can be different. For example, the jackpot probability a is the same as that shown in FIG. 9-1, and there are normal jackpots and probability variable jackpots as jackpot types. explain.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-2(A), the normal jackpot probability a1 and the variable probability jackpot probability a2 are each half of the jackpot probability a in FIG. 9-1. In this example, the execution ratio b1 of the notice X at the time of the normal jackpot is "60/100" when the setting value is "1", "50/100" when the setting value is "2", and "3" when the setting value is "3". In this case, it is "40/100". Therefore, the ratio (percentage of all variations) A1 (=probability of normal jackpot a1×execution ratio b1) of execution of advance notice X to the normal jackpot is “1/1000” regardless of the set value.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-2(A), the execution ratio b2 of the notice X at the time of the probability variable jackpot is 50/100 (unadjusted) regardless of the set value. Therefore, the ratio of the probability variable jackpot when the notice X is executed (percentage of all fluctuations) A2 (= probability variable jackpot probability a2 × execution ratio b2) is set to “1/1200” for the set value “1” 2", it is "1/1000", and the setting value is "3", it is "1/800". Then, the ratio (percentage of total variation) A (=A1+A2) that becomes a big hit when the notice X is executed is "44/24000" when the setting value is "1" and "48/24000" when the setting value is "2". ”, and “54/24000” when the set value is “3”.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-2(B), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of failure is "196/(299×80)" for the setting value "1", and " 192/(249×96)”, and “186/(199×120)” for the set value “3”. Therefore, the ratio of failure due to the execution of advance notice X (percentage of all fluctuations) is "196/24000" for the setting value "1", "192/24000" for the setting value "2", and "192/24000" for the setting value "2". 3" is "186/24000".

As a result of the above, as shown in FIG. 9B, the appearance rate C (=A+B) of the advance notice X in all fluctuations is "1/100" regardless of the set value. In this way, when there are a plurality of jackpot types, by varying the execution ratio of the notice effect for each jackpot type, the appearance rate of the notice effect is adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. can be By doing so, while the execution ratio of the notice effect is within the same or substantially the same range, when the notice effect is executed, the ratio of which jackpot type will be different depending on the setting value. Execution of the advance notice effect leads to expectation of a specific jackpot (for example, variable probability jackpot).

In the example shown in FIG. 9-2, the appearance rate of the notice X is adjusted to be the same (substantially the same) by varying the execution ratio of the notice X at the time of the normal jackpot. The appearance rate C of the notice X may be adjusted to be the same (substantially the same) by varying the time execution rate. That is, at least one of the announcement execution ratios b1 and b2 and d should be adjusted so that the appearance rate C=a1×b1+a2×b2+c×d of the announcement X is the same (substantially the same).

Further, the reliability D of the notice X may be the same (substantially the same) by varying the execution ratio of the notice X according to the jackpot type. In this case, regardless of the setting value, the reliability D of the advance notice effect D=(a1×b1+a2×b2)/(a1×b1+a2×b2+((1−a1−a2)×d) is the same (substantially the same). At least one of the execution ratios b1 and b2 of the notice and d may be adjusted as follows.By doing so, the notice effect is executed while the reliability of the notice effect is the same or substantially the same range. In this case, since the ratio of which type of jackpot is to be won differs depending on the set value, it is expected that a specific jackpot (for example, variable probability jackpot) will be achieved by executing the advance notice performance according to the set value.

Further, for some of the advance notice effects among the advance notice effects, the execution ratio of the specific jackpot type may be executed at the same execution ratio regardless of the set value. For example, there are normal big wins and variable probability big wins (distribution of 50% of the big win types) as the big win types, and a notice Y for notifying that the big wins will be the variable probability big wins may be executed as the advance notice effect. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in the case of a normal jackpot or a loss, the execution ratio of the notice Y is 0/100 (0%) regardless of the set value. On the other hand, the execution ratio b2 of the notice Y at the time of the variable probability big hit is "60/100" for the set value "1", "50/100" for the set value "2", and "40/100" for the set value "3". 100”. The jackpot probability is the same as the example shown in FIG. 9-1. Therefore, the appearance rate of the advance notice Y of all fluctuations is "1/1000" regardless of the set value. By doing so, the advance notice Y for notifying that the probability variable big win will be achieved can be executed at the same appearance rate regardless of the set value. In addition, it is possible to foresee that the variable probability big hit will occur regardless of the set value. In addition, since the advance notice Y is not executed regardless of the set value when a normal jackpot is won, the processing load can be reduced. Although not shown, the notice Y is executed only at the time of the variable probability big hit, so the reliability is 100%.

A foretelling effect for foretelling the possibility of a variable probability big hit may be executed when the game is lost. For example, in the case of executing the advance notice Z to give notice of a variable probability big hit as the notice effect, as shown in FIG. /100 (0%). On the other hand, the execution ratio b2 of the notice Z at the time of the probability variable jackpot is the same as the execution ratio of the notice Y shown in FIG. /1000”. Then, the execution ratio d of the notice Z at the time of failure is "3/2990" for the set value "1", "2.5/2490" for the set value "2", and "2" for the set value "3". /1990”. The rate B at which the advance notice Y is executed and results in a loss is "1/1000" in any set value.

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the advance notice Z in all fluctuations is "2/1000" regardless of the set value. Also, the reliability D of the advance notice Z is "1/2" regardless of the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate and reliability of the notice Z from changing according to the set value, resulting in an unintended rate, and in the case of a big win, a notice of a probability variable big win. Z can be performed favorably. In addition, since the advance notice Z is not executed regardless of the set value when a normal jackpot is won, the processing load can be reduced. Either the appearance rate or the reliability of the advance notice Z may differ depending on the set value.

Next, an example of the effect operation of the advance notice effect in 53AK will be described. The lower arrows in FIG. 9-5(A) indicate that variable display of decorative patterns is executed in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5. indicates that there is When it is decided to execute the notice X as the notice effect, the character image 53AK001 as shown in FIG. is executed. This allows the player to recognize that there is a high possibility of being controlled in an advantageous state. In particular, when the reliability is adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value, the player can recognize that there is a high possibility of being controlled in an advantageous state without being conscious of the set value. .

After that, as shown in FIG. 9-5(C), the decoration symbols showing the number 7 are stopped in the decoration symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and reach is established. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-5(D), the characters "Super Reach!" are displayed, and, for example, as shown in FIG. be started. During the ready-to-win performance of super-ready-to-win, for example, as shown in FIG.

Then, for example, just before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. be. As a result, the player comes to expect a variable probability big win. In particular, in the case of the notice Y, it is confirmed that the probability variable jackpot will be achieved, so the interest is improved.

In addition, when both the notice Y and the notice Z are made executable, the effect is to give notice/suggestion that both of them will result in a variable probability big hit. It is preferable to make some presentation modes such as contents different.

After that, when the display result is a big win, a message indicating that the friendly character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-5(G), and a big win combination is displayed as shown in FIG. A decorative pattern is derived and displayed. Note that the effect mode of the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 9-5 is an example, and any effect mode may be used as long as the effect can suggest/predict whether the game will be a big hit or the probability of a variable hit.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 53AK)
This characteristic portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further characteristics may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are essential configurations, and some of them may be omitted. Also, this characteristic portion and another characteristic portion may be combined as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, the set values are provided in three stages from 1 to 3, but the set values may be set in two stages or less or in four stages or more (for example, six stages). Also, the larger the set value, the more advantageous the probability of a big win for the player. However, the smaller the set value, the more advantageous the probability of a big win for the player. Also, the big-hit probability according to the setting value shown in FIG. 9-1 etc. is also an example, and the step-by-step big-hit probability according to the setting value is sufficient.

In the above embodiment, the execution ratio of the notice effect is set to the set value so that at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect for all set values (set values 1 to 3) is the same or substantially within the same range. I was trying to change (adjust) accordingly, but among the multiple types of setting values, at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect of some setting values is the same or almost within the same range. may For example, even if at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effects of the first setting value (for example, setting value 1) and the second setting value (for example, setting value 2) is set to be the same or within substantially the same range. good. Also, when the set values are in six stages, at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect of the first set value group (for example, set values 1 to 3) is set to be the same or within substantially the same range. , at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effects of the second set value group (eg, set values 4 to 6) may be set to be the same or substantially within the same range.

In the above embodiment, as the specific effect, the appearance rate and reliability of at least some of the advance notice effects are set to be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values, but the specific effect is controlled to be in an advantageous state. It may be another production that suggests that. For example, when determining the type of ready-to-win effect and the number of pseudo-runs on the side of the effect control board 12, by varying the determination ratio of the type of ready-to-win effect and the number of pseudo-runs according to the set value, First, the appearance rate and reliability of each ready-to-win effect and the appearance rate and reliability of each pseudo-run number may be controlled to be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values.

Further, when determining whether or not to execute the notice effect, a table in which a different execution ratio is assigned for each set value may be used to decide whether to execute the notice effect. A table serving as a reference may be provided, a table corresponding to the set value may be generated by calculating a parameter corresponding to the set value in the table, and whether or not to execute the notice effect may be determined using the generated table.

The execution ratio, appearance rate, and reliability of the advance notice effects shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4 are examples, and can be changed as appropriate without departing from the gist of the present invention. Further, as the advance notice effect, other advance notice effects other than the advance notice effects shown in the above embodiments may be executable. In such other notice effects, the appearance rate and reliability may be the same or within approximately the same range regardless of the set values, and in some or all of the other notice effects, the set values The rate of occurrence and the degree of reliability may be changed according to the set values assuming the same execution ratio regardless of the number. For example, among the notice effects, the notice effects with relatively high reliability are set so that the appearance rate and reliability are the same or within approximately the same range regardless of the setting value, and the reliability is relatively low or the appearance rate is low. A high advance notice effect may be executed at the same rate regardless of the set value. By doing so, compared to the case where the appearance rate and reliability are the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values for all the notice effects, the control burden related to the determination of whether or not to execute the notice effects is reduced. can be mitigated.

In addition, for a specific notice effect out of multiple types of notice effects, it is executed even if some setting values are lost, and if it is other setting values, it is not executed (or is executed). difficult). For example, a specific announcement effect with a high degree of reliability (such as a jackpot probability of 90% or more) is not executed at the time of loss in the case of a low setting value (for example, 1 to 3 in the case of 6 stages), and a high setting value (such as In the case of 4 to 6) in the case of 6 steps, it may be possible to execute at the time of failure. By doing so, it is possible to execute an unexpected performance by failing despite the execution of the specific advance notice performance, and to suggest/notify that the set value is high.

In the diagrams shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the execution ratio of the notice X is shown as the notice effect. ) may be determined. In this case, even when determining the type of notice effect, the execution ratio of each notice effect is set to the set value so that the appearance rate and reliability of each notice effect are the same or within approximately the same range regardless of the set value. It can be different according to your needs.

In the above embodiment, whether or not to execute the notice was determined regardless of the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss, but depending on the fluctuation pattern (whether or not there is reach and type, whether or not there is pseudo-run and number of times) at the time of loss, You may vary the execution ratio of an advance notice production.

In the above embodiment, the probability of a big hit in the variable probability state is not taken into consideration, but even in the variable probability state, the appearance rate and reliability of the announcement effect may be adjusted to the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set values. Also, depending on the game state, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect may be adjusted to be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values. For example, in a probability variable state (high probability state) where the probability of hitting a big hit is high and the announcement effect is easy to execute (high probability state), the appearance rate and reliability of the announcement effect are adjusted to the same or approximately the same range regardless of the set value, In the normal state (low-probability state), such adjustment may not be performed. In addition, between different game states, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect (specific notice effect) may differ, or may be adjusted to be the same or substantially the same range. For example, if the background is shared between the high-precision high base state and the low-precision high-base state to make it indistinguishable, a notice effect (a specific notice effect ) may be adjusted to the same or substantially the same range. Furthermore, regardless of the set values, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect (specific notice effect) may be adjusted to be the same or within substantially the same range. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game state from being recognized as visually indistinguishable due to the appearance rate and reliability of the announcement effect.

In the above embodiment, when there are normal jackpots and variable probability jackpots as jackpot types, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect are adjusted to the same or substantially the same range according to the jackpot types regardless of the set values. was becoming The difference between the jackpot types may be the size of the number of rounds of the jackpot, or the difference in the length of the time-saving state or probability variable state controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

When a small win is provided as a display result and the advance notice effect is executed even when a small win is obtained, the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of the big win and at the time of loss can be changed according to the set value as in the above embodiment. In addition, by varying the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of the small win according to the set value, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect may be adjusted to the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. . For example, in a gaming machine in which a specific area is provided in a winning opening opened in a small winning game state and controlled to a big winning game state based on passing through the specific area in the small winning game state, advance notice of a small winning is made. Since it can be said that the advance notice effect will be a notice of a big win, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect for predicting a small win may be adjusted to be the same or substantially within the same range regardless of the set values. In this case, when changing the small hit probability according to the set value, by changing the execution ratio of the notice effect in consideration of the small hit probability according to the set value, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect You can adjust the degree. Specifically, considering the big hit probability, small win probability, and loss probability according to the set value, by changing the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of the big hit, small win, and loss according to the set value, The appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect may be adjusted to be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values.

If it is possible to execute a notice effect in each of the multiple fluctuations of the pseudo-run, the appearance rate and reliability will be adjusted to the same or approximately the same range regardless of the setting value only for the notice effect in the final change of the pseudo-run. You may By doing so, it is possible to easily design the advance notice effect and reduce the processing load, compared to the case of adjusting the appearance rate and reliability for all variations of pseudo-runs.

In the above embodiment, only the big hit probability is changed by the setting value, but the effect control board 12 side may change the effect mode and the execution ratio of the effect according to the setting value. For example, even if the variation pattern is the same, a different ready-to-win effect or an effect during variable display such as a pseudo-run may be executed based on the set value. By doing so, the effect mode can suggest a set value according to the execution ratio of the effect.

Part or all of the configuration of the embodiment and the configuration of the modified example relating to the characteristic portion 53AK may be appropriately combined.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 53AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 53AK is
Any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3 or setting values 1 to 6) can be set, and an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) that is advantageous to the player at a different rate according to the set value game state) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 53AK),
A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, notice X, notice Y, notice Z, etc.) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific effect executing means determines the appearance rate of the specific effect when the set value is a first set value, and the appearance of the specific effect when the set value is a second set value different from the first set value. The specific effect is executed so that the rate and are within the same or substantially the same range (for example, FIGS. 9-1(B), (C), and FIGS. 9-2 to 9-3).
According to such a configuration, the specific effect can be executed with a common appearance rate regardless of the set value, so that the interest in the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The specific effect execution means varies the execution ratio of the specific effect when not controlled to the advantageous state according to a set value (for example, FIGS. 9-1 (B), (C), 9-2, and 9 -4) You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably adjust the appearance rate of the specific effect while maintaining the appearance rate of the specific effect when controlled to be in an advantageous state.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The specific effect executing means varies the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the advantageous state according to a set value (for example, FIG. 9-1(B), FIGS. 9-2 to 9-4). You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably adjust the appearance rate of the specific effect.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The ratio (for example, reliability) of being controlled to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed is the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the setting value (for example, FIG. 9-1 (B), FIG. 9 -3, Figure 9-4).
According to such a configuration, the specific effect is executed with the same appearance rate and reliability regardless of the set value, and it is suggested that the control is performed in an advantageous state, thereby improving interest.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
The ratio of controlling to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed may be changed according to the set value (eg, FIG. 9-1(C), FIG. 9-2).
According to such a configuration, the appearance rate of the specific effect is adjusted, but the reliability is changed, so that the game property of guessing the reliability can be provided, and the interest is improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
There are a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may vary the execution ratio of the specific effect according to a set value for each type of the advantageous state to be controlled (for example, FIGS. 9-2 to 9-4).
According to such a configuration, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to anticipate a specific advantageous state according to the set value, thereby improving interest. In addition, it is possible to suggest a set value depending on the type of specific effect, which improves interest.

(7) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
There are a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may not change the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the specific advantageous state regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 9-2 to 9-4).
According to such a configuration, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to expect a specific advantageous state regardless of the set value, which improves interest.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 54AK)
Further, the characteristic portion 53AK includes the invention related to the characteristic portion 54AK.
(1) The game machine related to the characteristic portion 54AK is
Any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3 or setting values 1 to 6) can be set, and an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) that is advantageous to the player at a different rate according to the set value game state) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 54AK),
A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, notice X, notice Y, notice Z, etc.) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific effect execution means is configured to control a ratio of control to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed when the set value is the first set value, and a second set value different from the first set value. The specific effect is executed so that the ratio of control to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed at the set value is the same or substantially the same range (for example, FIG. 9-1 ( B), (D), Figure 9-4).
According to such a configuration, the specific effect can be executed with a common reliability (the rate at which the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state) irrespective of the set value, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The specific effect executing means varies the execution ratio of the specific effect when not controlled to the advantageous state according to a set value (for example, FIGS. 9-1 (B), (D), and 9-4). may
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably adjust the reliability of the specific effect while maintaining the appearance rate of the specific effect when controlled to be in an advantageous state.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The specific effect executing means may change the execution ratio of the specific effect when the advantageous state is controlled according to a set value (for example, FIG. 9-1(B), FIG. 9-4). .
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably adjust the reliability of the specific effect.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The appearance rate of the specific effect may be set to be within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 9-1(B), 9-3, and 9-4).
According to such a configuration, the specific effect is executed with the same appearance rate and reliability regardless of the set value, and it is suggested that the control is performed in an advantageous state, thereby improving interest.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
The appearance rate of the specific effect may be changed according to the set value (for example, FIG. 9-1(D)).
According to such a configuration, although the reliability of the specific effect is adjusted, the rate of appearance changes, so the interest is improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
There are a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may vary the execution ratio of the specific effect according to a set value for each type of the advantageous state to be controlled (for example, FIGS. 9-2 to 9-4).
According to such a configuration, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to anticipate a specific advantageous state according to the set value, thereby improving interest. In addition, it is possible to suggest a set value depending on the type of specific effect, which improves interest.

(7) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
There are a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may not change the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the specific advantageous state regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 9-2 to 9-4).
According to such a configuration, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to expect a specific advantageous state regardless of the set value, which improves interest.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 57AK)
Next, the feature 57AK will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 57AK can display, as specific displays corresponding to the variable display, a suspended display corresponding to the suspended variable display before execution and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. In addition, it is possible to execute a pre-reading forewarning effect (holding change forewarning) that changes the display mode of the pending display and the active display.

In addition, it is possible to execute a zone effect that shifts to a zone in the effect, which indicates that the effect state is different from the normal effect state (when the power is turned on, etc.) and is in an advantageous state for the player. During the zone effect, a display or the like is performed on the image display device 5 to indicate that the zone is shifted to the effect zone. The zone effect can be executed over a plurality of times of variable display, and can notify the player that the state is advantageous over a plurality of times of variable display. Such a zone effect is also executed as a pre-reading forewarning effect indicating that it will be advantageous (such as high reliability of the big hit) based on the variable display before execution.

In this embodiment, a display change high probability zone indicating that the display mode of a specific display is likely to change is provided as a performance zone. The zone effect of the display change high probability zone is also called a specific effect. In the case of the display change high probability zone (during execution of the specific effect), the pending change notice is executed and the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than in the case of not being in the display change high probability zone. Thus, in the display change high probability zone, the player can expect that the display mode of the specific display will change, that is, a big win.

Further, in the characteristic part 57AK, by shifting from the display change high probability zone to the normal effect state, even after the display change high probability zone (execution of the specific effect) ends, the display mode changes in the display change high probability zone. The display mode of the specified display is more likely to change due to execution of the pending change notice than the specific display whose display mode has not changed in the display change high probability zone. As a result, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will further change even after the display change high probability zone ends. The feeling can be maintained, and the amusement of the game is improved.

In the characteristic portion 57AK, in addition to the display change high probability zone, a chance zone indicating that the probability of winning a big hit is high is provided as a zone for effect. The zone production of the chance zone is also called special production. Thus, in this embodiment, a plurality of zones are provided, and it is possible to shift to one of the zones as a zone effect. Details of the chance zone will be described later.

FIG. 10-1 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 57AK. FIG. 10-1(A) shows that variable display of decorative patterns is executed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 with downward arrows. indicates that there is The image display device 5 is provided with an active display area 57AK001 for displaying active display and a pending display area 57AK002 for displaying pending display. In the pending display area 57AK002, it is possible to display up to four pending displays corresponding to the upper limit number of pending, and the right side corresponds to old pending information and the left side corresponds to new pending information. When the variable display ends and the next variable display is performed, the active display is cleared and all specific displays (suspended display and active display) are shifted to the right.

In FIG. 10-1(A), two pending indications are displayed. Here, active indications and pending indications are all displayed as white circles in the normal fashion. Also, the zone effect is not being executed, and the state is the normal effect.

Here, when a game ball enters the winning ball device 6A, as shown in FIG. In addition, since it is determined to shift to the display change high probability zone here, the zone display 57AK003 indicating that it is the display change high probability zone is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5, and the display change high probability zone is controlled. be.

After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (C), at the timing when the combination of the decorative symbols for failure stops and the reserved display (specific display) shifts, a star image is displayed for the second reserved display. An effect (change-suggestion effect) in which 57AK004 moves and acts (collides) is executed. In the display change high probability zone, such a change suggesting effect suggests that the display mode of the pending display (specific display) of the action target will change (a pending change notice will be executed). Then, as shown in FIG. 10-1(D), the display mode of the pending display that is the object of the change suggesting effect changes to, for example, blue.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (E), at the timing when the combination of the decorative symbols for failure stops and the pending display (specific display) shifts, a change suggestion effect is produced for the first pending display. executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-1(F), the display mode of the pending display that is the object of the change suggesting effect changes to green, for example.

After that, as shown in FIG. 10-1(G), at the timing when the combination of the losing decorative symbols stops and the first pending display shifts to the active display, the change suggestion effect is executed for the active display. be. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-1(H), the display mode of the active display targeted for the change suggesting effect changes to purple, for example.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-1(I), at the timing when reach is established in the variable display corresponding to the active display, the change suggesting effect is executed for the active display. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-1(J), the display mode of the active display targeted for the change suggesting effect changes to red, for example. At this time, the zone display 57AK003 is erased, and the control to the display change high probability zone ends. As described above, in this embodiment, the display change high probability zone ends in the middle of the target variable display (variable display corresponding to the start winning that triggered the execution of the zone effect).

After that, as shown in FIG. 10-1(K), the display mode of the active display changes to gold, for example, without execution of the change-suggestion effect at the timing of developing to super reach.

In this way, when the display change high probability zone is entered, the display mode of the specific display is likely to change. Therefore, by moving to the display change high probability zone, the player can expect a change in the display mode of the specific display and a big win. Further, even after the end of the high probability zone of display change, the change timing of the specific display (Fig. 10-1 (K)) is provided, and the specific display whose display state changed before the end of the high probability zone of display change , the display mode is more likely to change even after the display change high probability zone ends than the specific display in which the display mode does not change. Thus, the disappointment of the player due to the end of the display change high probability zone can be suppressed, and the player's expectation can be maintained even after the display change high probability zone ends, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

Even if it is not in the display change high probability zone, the pending display notice may be executed and the display mode of the specific display may change. However, the specific display whose display mode is changed when it is in the display change high probability zone changes more easily than the specific display whose display mode is changed when it is not in the display change high probability zone. That is, the number of times the specific display changes tends to increase in the display change high probability zone. As a result, during the display change high probability zone, the user can experience many successful experiences such as changing the display mode of the specific display, and thus the interest in the display change high probability zone can be improved. In addition, the specific display whose display mode has changed when it is in the display change high probability zone is still further than the specific display whose display mode has changed when it is not in the display change high probability zone even after the display change high probability zone ends. The display mode is easy to change. Thus, the disappointment of the player due to the end of the display change high probability zone can be suppressed, and the player's expectation can be maintained even after the display change high probability zone ends, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

In this embodiment, the change timing of the display mode of the specific display is at the shift of the specific display and at a predetermined timing during active display. Further, in this embodiment, a change suggesting effect is executed to suggest that the display mode of the specific display will change. In particular, it is always executed at all timings when the specific display can change in the display change high probability zone. In addition, in FIG. 10-1, the display mode of the specific display is always changed (change is successful) after execution of the change suggesting effect, but there are cases where it is not changed (change is unsuccessful). . In other words, the change-suggestion effect may be false. By doing so, it is possible to effectively encourage the change of the display mode of the specific display to the display change high probability zone, thereby improving the presentation effect.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the display change high probability zone is not set, the change suggestion effect is not executed. It should be noted that the change suggestion effect may be executed even when the display change high probability zone is not set. In this case, the execution ratio of the change suggesting effect when the zone is not in the display change high probability zone may be lower than in the case of the display change high probability zone. For example, when the display change high probability zone is not set, the execution ratio of the fake change suggestion effect is lower than when it is the display change high probability zone (for example, the fake change suggestion effect is not executed), so that the relative time ratio can be lowered.

It should be noted that the ratio (success ratio) at which the display mode of the specific display changes after execution of the change suggesting presentation may be different between when the zone is not in the display change high probability zone and when it is in the other zone. For example, the success rate may be higher or lower when the display change high probability zone is not selected than when the display change high probability zone is not selected. Further, a plurality of performance modes of the change suggesting performance may be provided, and the success rate and the rate of the subsequent changing performance mode (the number of stages) may differ depending on the performance mode of the change suggesting performance. By doing so, the change-suggestion effects are diversified, and the change-suggestion effects can effectively arouse the player's expectations.

Further, when the display change high probability zone is not set, the mode of execution of the change suggesting effect may be different. When it is not in the display change high probability zone, a change suggesting effect different from that in the case of the display change high probability zone may be executed. By doing so, the production can be diversified, and the production effect can be improved.

It should be noted that regardless of which zone it is, the execution ratio of the change suggestion effect or the determination ratio of the effect mode in the case of execution may be varied depending on whether the specific display actually changes. By doing so, the execution ratio of the change suggesting effect increases in the display change high probability zone, and the change suggesting effect in which the display mode of the specific display changes at a high rate is more likely to be executed. In addition, the success rate can be varied depending on the presence or absence of the change-suggestion effect and the mode of effect.

FIG. 10-2 is a flow chart showing the operation of the specific display process for displaying the specific display of the characteristic portion 57AK and executing the pending change notice. The specific display process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the pre-reading notice setting process of step S161 of the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, for example. Note that the position (execution timing) of the corresponding display process is not limited to the pre-reading notice setting process as long as the effect operation according to the present invention can be realized.

In the specific display process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a starting winning has occurred due to the game ball entering the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening (step 57AKS001). In the process of step 57AKS001, for example, it is determined whether or not the start winning has occurred by determining whether or not the effect control command for designating the occurrence of the starting winning has been received from the main board 11 or not.

If it is determined that a starting prize has occurred (step 57AKS001; Yes), the final display mode (final display mode) of the specific display corresponding to the starting prize and the change process of the display mode of the specific display (pending change notice) A display change pattern corresponding to the effect mode) is determined (step 57AKS002).

In the process of step 57AKS002, based on the effect control command specifying the judgment result of the prefetch judgment received at the time of starting winning, the display result and the fluctuation category (such as rough fluctuation pattern classification) are read ahead, and the final display mode and display A change pattern is determined. In the process of step 57AKS002, by determining the final display mode and the display change pattern, the presence or absence of execution of pending change notice and its presentation mode are determined. In this embodiment, the pending change notice may be executed in which the display mode changes multiple times during the period from when the specific display is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the specific display ends. is determined, a display change pattern (change process) corresponding to the final display mode is determined.

In step 57AKS002, first, the final display mode is determined according to the display result, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-3. In this embodiment, as the display mode (display color) of the specific display, as shown in FIG. Display modes of "blue", "green", "purple", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" are provided. Then, as shown in the determination ratio in Figure 10-3, the display result (variation category) is at a different rate depending on whether it is "non-reach", "normal loss", "super reach loss", or "big hit" The final display mode is determined. In the decision ratio shown in Fig. 10-3, the possibility that the final display mode will be a big hit in the order of ("white" <) "blue" < "green" < "purple" < "red" < "gold" < "rainbow" (jackpot reliability), the possibility of becoming a super reach (super reach reliability), and the possibility of establishing a reach are high.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the display modes of "white", "blue", "green", "purple", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" are respectively changed to " Also written as a”, “b”, “c”, “d”, “e”, “f”, and “g”. In this embodiment, a plurality of display modes of the specific display are provided according to different colors, but a plurality of display modes of the specific display may be provided according to differences in shape, pattern, motif, and character. That is, the difference between "a" to "g" may be a difference in shape, pattern, motif, or character.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the display mode of the specific display remains "white" (when the final display mode is "white"), there is no big win, and the reliability of the big win is 0%. ing. When the display mode becomes "blue", the possibility of establishing reach increases. When the display mode becomes "green", at least reach is established. Also, when the display mode becomes "purple", it is determined that the super reach is achieved. However, when the final display mode is "blue" to "purple", the reliability of the big win is low.

When the display mode of the specific display is "red", the reliability of the big hit is significantly higher (12 times or more) than when it is "purple" or less. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether the display mode becomes "red" or more. When the display mode is "gold", the reliability of the big win is further increased (60%), and when the display mode is "rainbow", it is determined that a big win will occur. In addition, since the display mode of "rainbow" is determined only 7% at the time of the big hit (generally 1/300 etc. in normal state), the appearance rate is low, and the production with scarcity value (premium production) It has become.

Thus, in this embodiment, the display mode of the specific display is subdivided, and eight levels of display modes are provided. Therefore, when the display change high probability zone is reached, the display mode can be designed to change easily (the number of times of change is increased), and the number of times of change can be increased. Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-4(A) and 10-4(B), seven timings "hold 4" and "hold 3" are used as change timings (timings that can be changed) of the display mode of the specific display. , "H2", "H1", "A1", "A2", and "A3" are provided. "Hold 4" is when displayed as the fourth pending display. "H3" is when displayed as the third pending display (at the time of winning a prize or at the time of shift). "Hold 2" is when displayed as the second pending display (when winning a prize or when shifting). "Hold 1" is when displayed as the first pending display (when winning a prize or when shifting). "A1" is when displayed as an active display (at the time of winning a prize or at the time of shift). "A 2" is when it is displayed as an active display, and the timing of the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern (when the left and right patterns are temporarily stopped due to the establishment of reach, and when all patterns are temporarily stopped during pseudo continuous It is the timing of the first big hit in the middle, etc.). "A3" is the time when it is displayed as an active display, and when it develops into super reach (at the start of the reach performance of super reach, etc.).

As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of change stages and change timings of the specific display are provided. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the display mode of the specific display changes, and to improve the appeal of the pending change notice.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), the control to the display change high probability zone is executed at any timing from "H4" to "A1" and ends at the timing of "A2". do. Therefore, "A3" is always outside the display change high probability zone. "A3" is when it develops into super reach, so by ending the display change high probability zone before it develops into super reach, you can prevent the production from being complicated, and pay attention to the reach production of super reach. can be made Two or more change timings may be provided outside the display change high probability zone.

In the process of step 57AKS002, after the final display mode is determined, the display change pattern is determined according to the determined final display mode. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of display change patterns corresponding to scenarios of changes in the display mode of the specific display at each change timing are provided, and a plurality of display change patterns corresponding to the eventual change to the final display mode are provided. It is designed to be selected and determined from among the types.

FIG. 10-5 is a diagram showing part of the display change pattern of the characteristic portion 57AK. FIG. 10-5(A) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is b (blue). As shown in FIG. 10-5(A), in this embodiment, there are four display change patterns pt2-1, pt2-2, pt2-3, and pt2-3 as display change patterns when the final display mode is b (blue). pt2-4 are provided. FIG. 10-5 shows the display mode of the specific display at each change timing. For example, the display change pattern pt2-1 is displayed with a (white) from "H4" to "A1", and indicates that it changes from a (white) to b (blue) at "A2". In addition, the display change pattern pt2-4 indicates that "H4" to "A3" are displayed in b (blue).

When determining the display change pattern, one of the display change patterns is determined regardless of the current number of pending memories (that is, the number of pending displays or active displays when winning a prize). there is Therefore, when the display change pattern is determined to have passed the change timing at which the display mode changes (when the number of pending memories is less than the change timing at which the display mode changes), the specific display is performed in the post-change display mode. Is displayed. FIG. 10-5 also shows the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display, and the number of changes when the final display mode is b (blue) depends on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern. , 0 or 1 time. For example, if the number of pending memories is 2 or less and the display change pattern pt2-3 is determined, it is displayed in b "blue" from beginning to end, and the number of times of change is 0.

FIG. 10-5(B) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is c (green). As shown in FIG. 10-5(B), in this embodiment, seven types of display change patterns pt3-1 to pt3-7 are provided as display change patterns when the final display mode is c (green). . As shown in FIG. 10-5(B), the display mode of the specific display at each change timing is determined for each display change pattern. When the final display mode is c (green), the number of times of change is 0 to 2 depending on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern.

FIG. 10-5(C) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is e (red). As shown in FIG. 10-5(C), in this embodiment, 13 kinds of display change patterns pt5-1 to pt5-13 are provided as display change patterns when the final display mode is e (red). . As shown in FIG. 10-5(C), the display mode of the specific display at each change timing is determined for each display change pattern. When the final display mode is e (red), the number of times of change is 0 to 4 depending on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern.

FIG. 10-5(D) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is g (rainbow). As shown in FIG. 10-5(D), in this embodiment, ten kinds of display change patterns pt7-1 to pt7-10 are provided as display change patterns when the final display mode is g (rainbow). . As shown in FIG. 10-5(D), the display mode of the specific display at each change timing is determined for each display change pattern. When the final display mode is g (rainbow), the number of times of change is 1 to 6 depending on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern.

FIG. 10-5 shows the display change patterns when the final display mode is b, c, e, and g, but a plurality of display change patterns when the final display mode is other are also provided. In the process of step 57AKS002, one of the display change patterns shown in FIG. 10-5 is determined according to the final display mode. The display change pattern may be determined at any rate, but may be at an equal rate, or may be determined at a different rate depending on the display result. In the case of determining different ratios depending on the display results, it is possible to predict and suggest the possibility of a big win depending on the change timing.

The display change pattern shown in FIG. 10-5 is only an example, and display change patterns other than those shown in FIG. 10-5 may be provided. There may be fewer types.

After determining the final display mode of the specific display and the display change pattern corresponding to the change process of the display mode of the specific display in the processing of step 57 AKS002, whether or not to execute the zone effect and the type of zone in the case of execution are determined. (Step 57AKS003). As described above, in this embodiment, the effect of controlling to the display change high probability zone is executed as the zone effect. In addition, as a zone different from the display change high probability zone, an effect of controlling to a chance zone indicating a high possibility of winning a big hit is also executed. In this embodiment, a normal performance state in which zone performance is not executed, a display change high probability zone, and a chance zone are provided, and control is performed to any one of the zones when zone performance is executed.

In step 57 AKS003, first, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of times the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the start winning that has occurred this time has changed. FIG. 10-6(A) shows the determination ratio of whether to shift to the display change high probability zone. As shown in FIG. 10-6(A), when the number of times of change is 5 or 6, the zone is always shifted to the display change high probability zone, and when the number of times of change is 0 or 1, the display change is shifted to the zone. It is designed not to move to the high probability zone. Further, when the number of times of change is 2 to 4, the greater the number of times of change, the higher the percentage of transition to the display change high probability zone. By doing so, by controlling to the display change high probability zone, the rate at which the specific display changes increases, so that the player's sense of expectation can be improved.

The control to the display change high probability zone ends during the variable display of the target of the pending change notice (after the change timing "a2"), but regardless of the timing at which the display mode changes, the number of times of change is The higher the number, the higher the percentage of transitions to the display change high probability zone. is finished, the rate of change of the specific display (active display) that triggered the zone transition is high. Therefore, even after the control to the display change high probability zone is finished, the player's expectation can be maintained, and the loss of interest in the game can be prevented.

It should be noted that whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone may be determined depending on whether or not the active display changes at the change timing "a3" outside the display change high probability zone. For example, the higher the number of changes, the higher the ratio of shifting to the display change high probability zone, and if the active display changes in "A3", the ratio of shifting to the display change high probability zone is further increased. good too. By doing so, when the display change high probability zone is controlled, the rate of change even after the display change high probability zone ends is high. You will be able to maintain your feelings better.

In step 57AKS003, when it is determined to control to the display change high probability zone, the process proceeds to step 57AKS004 without determining whether to control to the chance zone. That is, in this embodiment, the control to the display change high probability zone is prioritized as the zone effect, and whether or not to control the display change high probability zone is determined. It is not controlled. Note that the order of priority of the zone effects may be reversed. That is, after determining whether or not to control the chance zone, if it is determined not to control to the chance zone, it may be determined whether or not to control the display change high probability zone.

When it is determined not to control to the display change high probability zone, it is determined whether to control to the chance zone. In this case, it is determined whether or not to shift to the chance zone according to the final display mode of the specific display corresponding to the start winning that has occurred this time. FIG. 10-6(B) shows the determination ratio of whether or not to shift to the chance zone. As shown in FIG. 10-6 (B), when the final display mode is g (rainbow), it is always shifted to the chance zone, and when the final display mode is f (gold), there is a high probability ( 80%), and if the final display mode is other than those, it is not moved to the chance zone. By doing so, the specific display can be easily changed to a mode with high reliability of the big hit by being controlled by the chance zone, so that the expectation of the player can be improved.

In addition, although the display change high probability zone also has a higher hit reliability than the normal production state, the chance zone has a higher hit reliability than the display change high probability zone (finally, the hit reliability The display mode changes to a high degree) state. In this way, by providing multiple zones such as a display change high probability zone where the display mode of the specific display is easy to change and the success experience is easy to enjoy, and a chance zone where the reliability of the big hit is extremely high, the variations of the zone production are diversified. As a result, the performance effect is improved and the amusement of the game is improved. It should be noted that the chance zone may be set to a state in which the reliability of the big win is higher than in the case of the normal presentation state, but the reliability of the big win is lower than in the display change high probability zone.

Subsequently, the determination results in steps 57AKS002 and 57AKS003 are stored (step 57AKS004), and control to display a specific display in a display mode according to the determination result and control to shift to a zone according to the determination result are executed ( step 57 AKS005). If the control to shift to the zone is executed here, the value corresponding to the zone flag that can identify the current zone should be set. In addition, control may be executed to notify that the zone has been changed by displaying an image corresponding to the zone to be changed on the image display device 5 or the like.

If it is determined that the start winning has not occurred (step 57AKS001; No), it is determined whether or not it is time to shift to the pending display (step 57AKS006). Since the pending display shifts when a new variable display is started, in step 57AKS006, for example, depending on whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11, the shift timing of the pending display is shifted. It should be determined whether or not there is

If it is determined that it is time to shift the hold display (step 57AKS006; Yes), control to erase the hold display of the shift source (step 57AKS007) and control to display a specific display of the shift destination (hold display or active display). Execute (step 57AKS008). At this time, for example, the display change pattern is referred to, and in the case of a specific display whose display mode changes at the shift destination, control is also executed to change the specific display to the display mode specified by the display change pattern. . Further, in the case of the display change high probability zone, control for executing the change suggesting effect shown in FIG. 10-1 is also executed. After that, the specific display process is terminated.

After executing the process of step 57AKS005 or when it is determined that it is not the shift timing for the pending display (step 57AKS006; No), it is determined whether or not it is time to change the active display (step 57AKS009). In step 57AKS009, for example, it is determined whether or not the change timing of "A2" and "A3" has come from the current fluctuation pattern and the value of the timer for measuring the fluctuation time, etc., and the display change pattern is referred to. Then, it is determined whether the display mode of the active display is to be changed at the reached change timing.

When it is determined that it is time to change the active display (step 57AKS009; Yes), control is performed to change the display mode of the active display (step 57AKS010). In step 57AKS010, for example, the display change pattern is referenced, and control is executed to change the active display to the display mode specified by the display change pattern. In addition, in the case of the display change high probability zone, control for executing a change suggestion effect is also executed.

If it is determined that it is not the time to change the active display (step 57AKS009; No), or after executing the processing of step 57AKS010, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the zone effect (step 57AKS011). Here, for example, it is determined whether or not the zone effect is being executed from the zone flag, and the end timing of the zone (for example, the display change high probability zone If it is "A2", and if it is a chance zone, it is determined whether or not it is the end of the target's fluctuation). If it is not the end timing of the zone effect (step 57AKS011; No), the specific display process is ended.

If it is the end timing of the zone (step 57AKS011; Yes), the control to end the zone effect is executed (step 57AKS012), and the specific display processing ends. At step 57AKS012, control may be executed to erase the image corresponding to the zone from the image display device 5. FIG.

As described above, by executing the specific display processing by the effect control CPU 120, the effect operation of the pending change notice and the zone effect as shown in FIG. 10-1 is realized.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 57AK)
This characteristic portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further characteristics may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are essential configurations, and some of them may be omitted. Also, this characteristic portion and another characteristic portion may be combined as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, the zone effect is controlled to either the display change high probability zone or the chance zone, but the display change high probability zone may be changed to the chance zone. For example, as shown in FIG. 10-7(A), when it is controlled to the display change high probability zone, as shown in FIGS. A zone display 57AK005 indicating that it is a chance zone may be displayed from the zone display 57AK003 indicating that it is a chance zone, and the transition to the chance zone may be performed. The timing of shifting from the display change high probability zone to the chance zone may be arbitrary, but for example, during variable display corresponding to the start winning that triggered the transition to the display change high probability zone (variable display for pending change notice) or , when the display mode of the specific display reaches a predetermined stage or higher (e.g., e or higher). By doing so, the display mode of the specific display is easily changed and the zone is shifted from the display change high probability zone where the success experience is easy to enjoy to the chance zone where the reliability of the big win is extremely high, thus increasing the variations of the performance and enhancing the interest of the game. improves. It should be noted that the chance zone may be shifted to the display change high probability zone. In addition, the zone may be changed a plurality of times during one zone presentation. For example, after transitioning to the chance zone, transitioning to the display change high probability zone at the timing when the display mode of the specific display changes, and then transitioning to the chance zone again.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-7(B)′, a zone display 57AK003 indicating a display change high probability zone and a zone display 57AK005 indicating a chance zone are both displayed, and two zones are displayed. It may be possible to migrate in parallel. By doing so, it is possible to inform that the display mode of the specific display is likely to change and that the reliability of the big hit is high, as well as the variety of effects is provided.

In the above embodiment, the change process of the display mode of the specific display (the production mode of the pending change notice) is determined by selecting and determining the display change pattern, but the determination method is arbitrary. The display mode of the specific display at each change timing may be individually determined each time. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the change timing is when the hold display is shifted. However, the change timing is not limited to this, and the display state of the hold display may be changed at any timing during variable display.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when a plurality of specific displays are displayed, when pending change notice is being executed for one specific display, execution of pending change notice for other specific displays is restricted. not Therefore, after the display mode of one specific display is changed, the display mode of another specific display (for example, the specific display corresponding to the newly generated start winning) may change. On the other hand, in the case of the display change high probability zone, execution of the pending change notice may be restricted with respect to the specific display corresponding to the newly generated start winning. As a result, it is possible to prevent the specific display and the variable display to be noticed from becoming difficult to understand in the display change high probability zone. In this case, the specific display newly displayed in the high display change probability zone after the end of the high display change probability zone does not change its display mode. On the other hand, the display mode of the specific display whose display mode has changed in the display change high probability zone (that is, the specific display that triggered the zone transition) may further change. Therefore, it can be said that the specific display whose display mode is changed during the display change high probability zone is more likely to change its display mode than the specific display whose display mode is not changed during the display change high probability zone.

Even after the display change high probability zone (specific effect) ends, the specific display whose display mode has changed during the display change high probability zone is higher than the specific display whose display mode has not changed during the display change high probability zone. In addition to the fact that the specific display whose display mode changed during the display change high probability zone changes more frequently, the display mode does not change during the display change high probability zone. The specific display may not change at all, and the specific display whose display mode has changed in the display change high probability zone may change. In addition, the specific display whose display mode is changed during the display change high probability zone tends to change its display mode more times than the specific display whose display mode is not changed during the display change high probability zone.

The display mode of a plurality of specific displays may be changed in the display change high probability zone. For example, by changing the specific display other than the specific display (specific display of the target) corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the transition to the display change high probability zone to "blue", it may be difficult to understand which target is. . At that time, a pending change notice in which multiple specific displays change at the same time, and a change suggestive production that suggests that multiple specific displays will change at the same time (for example, a production in which an effect is applied to the entire reserved display area or an image acts, etc.) may be executed. In this case, a plurality of specific indications may be changed successfully, or only one may be changed. Also, the pending change notice in which a plurality of specific displays change at the same time may be executed only in the display change high probability zone, or may be executed in other zones or in a normal state where zone production is not in progress. good.

In the above embodiment, there is one type of display change high probability zone, but there may be a plurality of types of display change high probability zone. For example, a weak display change high probability zone in which the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than in the normal state and a strong display change high probability zone in which the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than the weak display change high probability zone are provided. may In this case, the display color of the zone display 57AK003 may be made different to indicate which display change high probability zone it is. For example, the weak indication change high probability zone may be indicated by a blue zone indication 57AK003, and the strong indication change high probability zone may be indicated by a red zone indication 57AK003. Then, the weak indication change high probability zone may be shifted to the strong indication change high probability zone. In order to shift from the weak display change high probability zone to the strong display change high probability zone, the display color of the zone display 57AK003 may be changed. By doing so, it is easy to understand that all of them are display change high probability zones, and it is possible to notify that the degree of expectation has changed. Further, the display change high-probability zone may include a display change high-probability zone in which the specific display has a high probability of changing and a display change high-probability zone in which the specific display tends to change more frequently.

When a plurality of types of display change high probability zones are provided, it may be possible to switch between each display change high probability zone and the chance zone. For example, the weak display change high probability zone may be shifted to the strong display change high probability zone, and then the chance zone. Alternatively, the weak indication change high probability zone may be shifted to the chance zone, and then the strong indication change high probability zone may be transitioned. In addition, it is also possible to limit the transition to a specific route so that the zone does not move, or to perform an effect such that the route diverges (a effect indicating which zone to move to).

In the above-described embodiment, the change suggesting effect is a effect in which the star image 57AK004 acts on the specific display, but the effect mode of the change suggesting effect is not limited to this, and a predetermined image such as a character image is displayed. Alternatively, it may suggest that the display mode of the specific display changes due to sound, lamp, movement of the movable body, or the like. Further, the effect mode (effect device) of the change suggesting effect may be changed depending on whether the zone effect is being performed or not, and depending on which zone it is.

In the above embodiment, the zone displays 57AK003 and 57AK005 are used to notify that the zone effect is being executed and to which zone the control is performed. The zone may be notified by a lamp, an operation of a movable body, or the like. In addition, the background image may differ greatly depending on the zone, the type of zone may be displayed in the display area of the specific display (active display area 57AK001, the reserved display area 57AK002), and the display mode and color of the display area of the specific display may be displayed. may vary by zone.

A sub-display device (sub-liquid crystal) different from the image display device 5 is provided to display the type of zone on the sub-liquid crystal. You may Also, the display position, display size, and animation mode (update speed, operation speed, operation direction, etc.) of the specific display may be varied depending on the zone type. Any one of the above zone notification methods may be used, or any combination thereof may be used.

Part or all of the configuration of the embodiment and the configuration of the modified example relating to the characteristic portion 57AK may be combined as appropriate. Also, the invention relating to the characteristic portion 57AK and the invention relating to other characteristic portions may be combined as appropriate.

For example, by combining the invention relating to the characteristic portion 57AK with the invention relating to the characteristic portions 53AK and 54AK, the appearance rate and reliability of the pre-reading notice effect (holding change notice, zone effect) of the present application are the same or substantially the same regardless of the setting value. The execution ratio of the pre-reading advance notice effect may be adjusted according to the set value so as to be within the same range.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 57AK)
(1) The game machine related to the characteristic portion 57AK is
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., pending display, active display) corresponding to a variable display,
A change effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, step 57AKS010) for effect control CPU 120 that changes the display mode of the specific display,
Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing processing of steps 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, zone effect of display change high probability zone),
When the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not being executed,
Even after the end of the specific effect, the specific display whose display mode changed while the specific effect was being executed is more displayed than the specific display whose display mode was not changed while the specific effect was being executed. The mode is likely to change (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of times the display mode of the specific display changes).
According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When the specific effect is being executed and when the specific effect is not being executed, a change suggestive effect (for example, a star shown in FIG. image 57AK004 acting on the specific display) may be executed at different rates (for example, the change suggestive effect is executed only in the display change high probability zone).
According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The specific display whose display mode changes to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is executed is more likely to change in display mode than the specific display whose display mode changes to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is not executed ( For example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it may be determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of times the display mode of the specific display changes.
According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
Special effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS011) that can execute a special effect different from the specific effect (for example, zone effect of chance zone).
The display mode of the specific display may change more easily when the specific effect is being executed than when the special effect is being executed.
According to such a configuration, the presentation becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
Special effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS011) that can execute a special effect different from the specific effect (for example, zone effect of chance zone).
When the special performance is executed, the ratio of control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher than when the specific performance is executed,
It may be possible to shift from the specific effect to the special effect (for example, see FIG. 10-7).
According to such a configuration, the presentation becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Moreover, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

As the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to display a specific display (for example, a hold display, an active display) corresponding to the variable display, and a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a pachinko game Machine 1), a change effect execution means for changing the display mode of the specific display (for example, step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, step 57AKS010 CPU 120 for effect control that executes the processing) and a specific effect (for example, display change a specific effect executing means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011 for execution control CPU 120) capable of executing the zone effect of the high probability zone), and when the specific effect is executed The display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not executed, and the specific display whose display mode has changed to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is executed is the specific display that is executed. The display mode is more likely to change than the specific display whose display mode has changed to a predetermined mode when it is not displayed (for example, in the processing of step 57AKS003, whether to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display) or not), and setting means (for example, setting value change in step S6A) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) with different advantages for the player (such as the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes processing), and an effect executing means (for example, the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing the suggestive effect over a specific period, and the effect executing means is a first suggestion effect in which, after suggesting the control of the advantageous state until a specific timing in the specific period, the suggestion about the control of the advantageous state is continuously performed as an effect that can be executed after the specific timing. and a second suggestion effect for continuously suggesting the control of the advantageous state and suggesting the setting of the setting means (for example, see FIG. 12-12). ) gaming machines.

According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved. Further, by enabling execution of either the first suggesting effect or the second suggesting effect after the specific timing, the game interest can be improved.

Alternatively, the gaming machine of the present invention can also display a specific display corresponding to the variable display (for example, a hold display, an active display), and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, Pachinko game machine 1), a change effect execution means for changing the display mode of the specific display (for example, step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, step 57AKS010 CPU 120 for effect control that executes the processing) and a specific effect (for example and a specific effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of steps 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing the zone effect of the display change high probability zone, and the specific effect is executed. When the specific effect is not executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not executed. is not executed, the display mode is more likely to change than the specific display whose display mode has changed to a predetermined mode (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, the transition to the display change high probability zone is made according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display). setting means (for example, set in step S6A) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) with different advantages for the player (such as the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the value change process), and an effect executing means (for example, the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing the suggestive effect over a specific period, and the effect The executing means performs a first suggestion effect in which the suggestion regarding control of the advantageous state is made until a specific timing in the specific period and then the suggestion ends, and the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state is continued after the specific timing. and a second suggestive effect for suggesting the setting of the setting means (for example, see FIGS. 12-13).

According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved. In addition, by making it possible to execute either the first suggesting performance in which the suggestion is made until the specific timing and ends, or the second suggestive performance in which the suggestion is made even after the specific timing, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition to the suggestion regarding the setting by the second suggestion effect, the setting value may be suggested according to the execution frequency of the specific effect (for example, the zone effect of the display change high probability zone). For example, it is determined by a lottery or the like whether or not to execute a specific effect for each timing at which the specific effect can be executed, and by varying the ratio of determining the execution of the specific effect according to the set value. The specific effect may be more likely to be executed as the set value is more advantageous to the player. By doing so, when the specific effect is executed, the player can expect that the display mode of the specific display will change and that the set value will be advantageous to the player. , the game interest can be further improved.
In addition to the suggestion regarding the setting by the second suggestion effect, the ratio of the specific display whose display mode has changed in the specific effect (for example, the zone effect of the display change high probability zone) further changes in the display mode after the specific effect ends. may be used to suggest setting values. For example, when the display mode of the specific display changes in the specific effect, it is determined by lottery or the like whether or not to further change the display mode after the specific effect ends, and the display mode is further changed according to the set value. By varying the rate of determining the change, the more advantageous the set value is to the player, the easier it is to change the display mode of the specific display. By doing so, when the display mode of the specific display is further changed, the player's expectation that the set value is advantageous to the player is improved, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. .
In addition to the suggestion regarding the setting by the second suggestion effect, in the specific effect (for example, the zone effect of the display change high probability zone) or after the specific effect is completed, after the change when changing the display mode of the specific display mode is selected from a plurality of types by lottery or the like, and by varying the selection ratio of each mode after the change according to the set value, the set value is more advantageous to the player. , the mode after the change may be made more likely to be a specific type of mode. In this way, the display mode of the specific display can be varied after the change, and the set values are expected to be advantageous to the player when the display mode changes to the specific type. is improved, the amusement of the game can be improved.
In addition, if the setting value is suggested by a plurality of elements (for example, two elements such as the suggestion regarding the setting by the second suggestion effect and the execution frequency of the specific effect, etc.), the player can If a setting value that is advantageous to the player is suggested, the player can be more confident that the setting value is advantageous to the player, and a setting value that is advantageous to the player is not suggested for a certain element. Even in such a case, if advantageous setting values are suggested by other factors, the player can continue to expect that the setting values will be advantageous to the player, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of the game, a gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that is controllable to an advantageous state (eg, jackpot gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, A setting means (for example, a game control microcomputer that executes a set value change process in step S6A) that can be set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) that have different advantages for the player 100 CPU 103, etc.), and effect execution means (for example, image display device 5, effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing a suggestive effect over a specific period. After the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state is made, a first suggestion effect in which the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state is continuously performed and the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state are performed as effects that can be executed after the specific timing. Among the second suggestive effects that are performed continuously and that suggest the setting of the setting means, any one of the suggestive effects can be executed (for example, see FIGS. 12-12).

Alternatively, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of improving the amusement of the game, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, A setting means (for example, a game control microcomputer that executes a set value change process in step S6A) that can be set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) that have different advantages for the player 100 CPU 103, etc.), and effect execution means (for example, image display device 5, effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing a suggestive effect over a specific period. After making a suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state, a first suggestion effect for ending the suggestion, and after the specific timing, the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state is continuously performed and the suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is performed. Among the second suggestive effects, there is a game machine capable of executing any one of the suggestive effects (for example, see FIGS. 12-13). An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

Characteristic portions of other embodiments will be described below.
(Description of features related to set values)
Characteristic portions relating to set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko game machine 1 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 while being accommodated in a board case configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. ing. Although not shown, the main board 11 also includes a lock switch for switching to a set value change state in which the set values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot switch to be described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as winning probability (ball-out rate) and an open sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame are provided. Incidentally, the set value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the game parlor attendant or the like can check the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

Operation units such as the lock switch and the setting changeover switch, which can be operated by a staff member of the game arcade, are provided in the setting changeover body portion and housed together with the main board 11 in the board case. The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case so that they can be operated without opening the substrate case.

A board case accommodating a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁Therefore, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate the lock switch and the setting changeover switch when the game machine frame is closed. . In addition, since the lock switch requires operation of a setting key possessed by a game hall attendant or the like, it can only be operated by an administrator who possesses the setting key. The lock switch is also a switch that can be switched between ON and OFF with a setting key. Although the door key and the setting key are separate keys in the present embodiment, they may be combined into one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged in the substrate case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the frame for the game machine is not opened, the front side when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 with the frame for the game machine opened. This is the actual front and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加In this way, the display monitor is arranged in front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame opened. However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section. Each of the first to fourth display units of the display monitor is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. . The first to fourth display sections of the display monitor are capable of lighting or blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

As a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, a game information display section may be provided at the lower left position of the game area. In the game information display section, a round indicator, a right-handed lamp, a probability variable lamp, and a time-saving lamp are collectively arranged. The round indicator can display the number of rounds of the big win game and the type of the big win during the big win game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which a game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-probability base state or a big-hit game state as a time-saving state. The variable probability lamp lights up when it is in the variable probability state. The time-saving lamp lights up when it is in the time-saving state. The round indicator consists of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. As for the setting value, 6, which is the largest value, is the most disadvantageous value for the game arcade side, and the smaller the set value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the more advantageous the game arcade side is. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the probability of a big win may change depending on the set value, or the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value although the jackpot probability is constant. good too. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIGS. 11-1(A) and 11-1(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. Of these, FIG. 11-1 (A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when the figure is the second special figure. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which the hit determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for each set value is set to the variable display result of the special symbol (special symbol display result). is. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. The hit determination value in the display result determination table is also assigned to the special figure display result in the range of 0-65535. The display result determination table is not limited to using separate display result determination tables for the first special figure and the second special figure, and the display result determination common to the first special figure and the second special figure A table may be used.

When the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the display result is 1020 to 1346. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result, 1020 ~ Up to 1383 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1383. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

In each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) are special figures of "jackpot" assigned to display results. As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (for example, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1/1 when the set value is 4). 240, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state is higher. (For example, 1/200 when the setting value is 1, 1/180 when the setting value is 2, 1/160 when the setting value is 3, 1/140 when the setting value is 4, and 1/140 when the setting value is 4. 1/120 for 5 and 1/100 for a set value of 6). Each display so that the probability of being determined to control to the jackpot game state is higher when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is in the probability variable state (high probability state) than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state. In the result determination table, the determination value is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

Depending on each setting value, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the jackpot probability in the probability-variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state) is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the normal state or the time saving state The multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability is 1.625 times)), and the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state at each setting value , may be set to a constant value (for example, 5 times).

In each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the same value A judgment value is assigned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/200. On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the first special figure. Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/100.

Regardless of the set value, the special figure display result is not limited to the form in which the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the same probability, but the special figure display result is displayed according to the set value. The probability of being determined to control to the small winning game state as "small winning" may be varied. The special figure display result is not limited to a form with a different probability of being determined when controlling the special figure display result as "small hit" according to the fluctuation special figure, and the special figure display result is " The probability that it is determined to control to the small hit game state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

Focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result judgment table, in the first special figure display result judgment table when the game state is normal state or time saving state , the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the setting value. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1 While only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are " assigned to the jackpot. The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit determination values is a small hit for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set within the common numerical range of judgment values. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit determination value, 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33094 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1, the common numerical range Only numbers within (1020-1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, numbers within the range of the common number range plus the non-common number range will be the "jackpot" assigned. The non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the setting value increases. For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, 32767 of the hit determination values are the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. The range up to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range of big hit determination values (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33094 as a reference value (small hit reference value) for small hit determination values. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. Set to a common numeric range. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. In this way, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1 While only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are " assigned to the jackpot. The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small hit for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set within the common numerical range of judgment values. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the big hit in the case of the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range of the determination value (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33421 as a reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value). This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the range of the common numeric range plus the non-common numeric range are assigned to the "jackpot" It is The non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the set value increases. For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, out of the hit determination value The range from 32767 to 33421 is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the big hit in the case of the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33421 as a reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value). This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and setting value, determination included within a continuous numerical range consisting of a common numerical range or a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range based on the hit determination value of 1020 The value is set as the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) based on the hit judgment value of 32767 is judged as the small hit. As a numerical range of values, a variable display result is determined.

In each display result determination table, if the fluctuation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same) be. In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

In each game state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big win game state is determined is the lowest, and the value of the set value is the lowest. Judgment values are assigned so that the larger the value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: setting value 6 > setting value 5 > setting value 4 > setting value 3 > set value 2 > set value 1). The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of the random number MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the special symbol wins (big hit). It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when the random number MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small win, it is determined that the special symbol is a small win. In this way, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with the probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIG. 11-1 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to decide whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 are not limited to the configuration in which a total of six set values, ie, 1 to 6, are provided. Seven or more may be sufficient. The larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (increasing the probability of a big win, making it easier to determine a specific kind of big win, etc.). It may be arranged such that the smaller the set value set in the machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

While the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game property itself is not limited to a form that does not change, but the game is played according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The sex may change. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). A game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

Next, the processing within the game control main processing in the characteristic portion regarding the set value will be described. FIG. 11-2 is a flow chart showing an example of processing performed in the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. The processing in the game control main processing is, for example, in the game control main processing shown in FIG. ) and initial settings such as settings to make the RAM 102 accessible.

When processing within the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated. (Step S1A). Before the process of step S1A, the process of clearing the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition may be performed.

If the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), the RAM clear flag is set (step S2A) and the process proceeds to step S3A; if the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), step S2A , the process proceeds to step S3A.

At step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch is ON (step S3A). If the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor is ON (step S4A). When the open sensor is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the game machine frame open (step S4A; Yes), is the RAM clear flag set? It is determined whether or not (step S5A).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), a set value change process (step S6A) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8A, If the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), set value confirmation processing (step S7A) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8A. move on. If the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the open sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process proceeds directly to step S8A.

The set value change process is performed by turning on the lock switch and the clear switch while the game machine frame is open when restarting the pachinko game machine 1 after turning it off. It is the process that takes place. In the setting value change process, a process of transmitting a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of updating the contents of the address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary setting value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, According to the state of the lock switch, a process of updating and storing the provisional set value as an actual set value in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and a process of transmitting a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed.

In the set value confirmation process, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after being turned off (power off), the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on (clear switch is off) while the game machine frame is open. This is a process performed by In the setting value confirmation process, the process of transmitting a setting value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12, the display of the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is started on the display monitor, and the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with A process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall through a terminal board (not shown), and ending the display etc. according to the state of a lock switch, setting to the effect control board 12 A process of transmitting a value confirmation end notification command is performed.

It should be noted that in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, from the start of each process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B and the lighting of the round indicator, the first reservation indicator 25A, By starting the flashing of the second holding display 25B and the right-handed lamp, a player, a game hall staff member, or the like can see from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 that the pachinko machine 1 is changing or setting the setting value. It is sufficient if it is possible to recognize that the value is being checked. Further, the lighting pattern of the segments constituting the round indicator may be any lighting mode, especially as long as it does not correspond to any of the plurality of jackpot types. Further, the segments forming the round indicator may be illuminated in different manners at the start of the set value change process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is to be cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (step S9A) is to be executed). (step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S10A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), the RAM is cleared. The process proceeds to step S10A without executing the process (step S9A). As other processing, the CPU 103 determines, for example, whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started by a cold start or whether it is restored to the state before the power failure (started by a hot start) depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set. ), perform processing corresponding to each (step S10A), and end the processing in the game control main processing.

In the RAM clearing process, data other than the set values and the RAM clear flag are cleared by storing "00H" in addresses other than the first address (F000) where the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are stored. processing takes place. In the RAM clearing process, data other than the set values are not cleared, but when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F000 in the characteristic part 048AK of this embodiment) F003 and later of FXXX) may be cleared only.

The process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all the segments constituting the display monitor over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. In addition, only some of the segments may be blinked, or at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor may be lit. Also, in the processing within the game control main processing, for example, based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), or that the power has been restored from a power failure during setting change, A process of transmitting an error designation command according to the abnormality of the set value to the effect control board 12 may be included. Furthermore, the first display section, second display section, third display section, and fourth display that constitute the display monitor are used to notify (error notification) that a set value abnormal error has occurred or that power has been restored from a power failure during setting change. A process of displaying "E." may be performed in each of the sections. In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and manages the game hall through a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer, and thereafter, the CPU 103 displays until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.). The monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B may perform error occurrence notification.

In the processing within the game control main processing, after it is determined that the lock switch is ON in step S3A, when it is determined that the open sensor is OFF in step S4A, the opening of the gaming machine frame is detected. Since the operation of the lock switch is detected without being detected, an error designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 and an error notification may be performed by a display monitor or the like. The process of step S10A may include a process of transmitting a set value notification command to the effect control board 12. The setting value notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the process of step S10A regardless of whether the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed. As a result, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, regardless of whether or not the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the set value can be stored in a identifiable manner. can.

When an abnormal set value is set or when the power is restored from a power failure during the change of the set value, the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B Notify the occurrence of an error. , the staff of the game hall or the like can recognize from both the front side and the rear side of the pachinko game machine 1 that an error has occurred or that the electricity has recovered from the power failure during the change of the setting value. . In addition, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved by making it possible for the management device of the game hall to recognize the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 or the recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value. become.

As described above, the display result determination table provided in the pachinko game machine 1 has a hit determination value of 1020 to 1237, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIG. is set as a common numerical range for the jackpot determination value. If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1), the value corresponding to each setting value from 1238 The range up to is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6, the hit determination value of 1020 is used as the big hit reference value, and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value are continuous. Since it is set to be a numerical value range, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range according to each setting value. It suffices to determine whether or not it is within the numerical range of up to . As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

The numerical range of the jackpot determination value within the range of 0 to 65535 is set at one place with 1020 as the reference value, so compared to the case where multiple numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value are provided, random It is not necessary to determine whether or not the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the big-hit determination value (whether or not to control to the big-hit game state) multiple times. As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 11-1, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is normal state, time saving state, or variable probability state, the hit determination value 1020 is used as the big hit reference value, and the big hit determination Since the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of values are set to be continuous numerical ranges, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is Whether it is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and whether it is within the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the probability variable state It is sufficient to judge no. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 11-1, in the display result determination table, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure is different (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, whereas the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table The number of determination values included in the numerical range is 655, which is about double). On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the small hit gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure It suffices to determine whether or not Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the small winning game state.

As shown in FIG. 11-1, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko game machine 1 regardless of the set value set to the pachinko game machine 1. It is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value in the case of 6. Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within a numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each set value. When it is determined whether or not to be controlled to the small hit game state, the random number MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure. It should be determined whether or not Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the big-hit game state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the small-hit game state.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 66AK)
In the characteristic part 66AK, it is possible to execute a specific effect at a predetermined rate during execution of the variable display. The specific effect is a effect in which various notices and suggestions are made. The specific effect of the characteristic part 66AK includes, as executable effects, an advantage suggesting effect suggesting control to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, and a setting suggesting effect suggesting a set value in the pachinko game machine 1. there is

FIG. 12-1 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of the effect control process processing as the variable display start setting processing regarding the characteristic portion 66AK. In the variable display start setting process, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step 66AKS011). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbols, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbols, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, the advance notice effect determination process is executed (step 66AKS012). The advance notice effect determination processing makes it possible to decide the advance notice effect included in the advantageous suggesting effect.

After the announcement effect determination process is executed, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step 66AKS013). The production control pattern may include a special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, a notice production control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various production executions. For example, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, select one of the prepared special figure variation production control patterns and set it as a usage pattern. In addition, one of a plurality of prepared notice effect control patterns may be selected and set as a usage pattern in accordance with the determination result of the notice effect determination process of step 66AKS012. In addition, it is not limited to setting a separate production control pattern as the special figure fluctuation time production control pattern and the notice production control pattern, but one production control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution setting of each production is set. There may be. When the production control pattern is determined, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the initial value of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area (production control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 is set. (step 66AKS014). Also, the setting for starting the variation of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 is performed (step 66AKS015). At this time, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation production control pattern) determined in step 66AKS013 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. The variation of the decorative design may be started in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the pending display update setting at the start of the variable display is set (step 66AKS016). For example, in the pending display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part (leftmost display part) corresponding to the pending number "1" is erased (digested), and other pending numbers "2" to The pending display in the display portion corresponding to "8" is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the pending display is shifted. In the active display section provided on the screen of the image display device 5, active display corresponding to the erased (extinguished) pending display in the pending display area may be performed. In addition, when the number of pending memories is "0", if the variable display is started immediately based on the occurrence of the first start winning or the second starting winning, the active display area will be displayed without updating the pending display. A setting may be made to update the active display in the . After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step 66AKS017), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 12-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 66AKS011 of the variable display start setting process as the stop symbol determination process. In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is executed (step 66AKS021). Whether or not the ready-to-win effect of super reach is executed can be determined based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command transmitted from the main substrate 11, for example.

When the ready-to-win effect of super-ready-to-win is not executed (step 66AKS021; No), the final stop symbol for non-ready-to-win or normal-to-win is determined (step 66AKS022), and the stop symbol determination process is terminated. At the time of non-reach, the variable display result becomes "losing". The normal reach includes a case where the variable display result is "big hit" and a case where the variable display result is "loss". In the non-ready-to-win state in which the variable display mode of the decoration design does not become the ready-to-win mode, the fixed decoration design of the non-ready-to-win combination is stop-displayed as the final stop design. The final stop symbol at the time of non-reach is determined so that the "left" and "right" ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R are different (mismatched) ornamental symbols. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left finalized symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and refers to a prepared left finalized symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121. , the left finalized decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined from among the finalized decorative designs. Next, by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right finalized symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to the prepared right finalized symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc. It is only necessary to determine the right confirmed decorative design to be stop-displayed in the "right" decorative design display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 among the designs. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined decorative symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to a medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc. Among the symbols, the medium-determined decoration symbols to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decoration symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined.

At the time of normal reach when the variable display result is "losing", the determined decoration pattern of the reach-losing combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of reach-losing. The final stop symbol at the time of reach loss is determined so that the "left" and "right" ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R have the same (matching) ornamental symbol. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data representing random numbers for determining the left and right finalized symbols updated by the random number circuit 124, etc. , among the confirmed decorative patterns, the decorative patterns having the same pattern number and stopped and displayed together in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Furthermore, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by a random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to a medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc., a fixed decorative pattern Among them, the medium-determined decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative design display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Here, for example, when the pattern number of the middle fixed decorative pattern is the same as the pattern number of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern, when the fixed decorative patterns become a big hit combination, an arbitrary value By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to or from the pattern number of the medium-determined decorative pattern, the determined decorative patterns are not a big-hit combination but a reach-losing combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium fixed decorative pattern, the difference (design difference) between the pattern numbers of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern may be determined, and the medium fixed decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern difference may be set. .

At the time of normal reach when the variable display result is "big hit", the determined decoration pattern of the big win combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of the big win. The final stop symbols at the time of the big hit are determined to be the same (matching) decoration symbols in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the jackpot fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot fixed symbol determination table prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5L, and 5L on the screen of the image display device 5, The decorative symbols having the same symbol number to be stop-displayed together in 5C and 5R may be determined.

When the ready-to-win effect of super-ready-to-win is to be executed (step 66AKS021; Yes), the final stop symbol for super-to-win is determined (step 66AKS023). At the time of super reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "loss". At the time of super reach when the variable display result is "losing", the determined decoration pattern of the reach losing combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of reaching losing. When the variable display result is "big win", the determined decoration pattern of the big win combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of the big win. At the time of super reach, regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "losing", the same (matching) decorative pattern is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. It is stopped and displayed as a fixed decoration pattern. The left and right decorative symbols constituting such a reach-losing combination or a big-hit combination are also called reach symbols. Decorative patterns that can be determined as ready-to-win patterns may include a plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as seven types of decorative patterns corresponding to numbers 1 to 7, for example. The decoration pattern corresponding to the number may be only the effect image showing the number, or may be the effect image showing various characters in addition to the number.

The ready-to-win pattern is determined as one of a plurality of decoration patterns by referring to a ready-to-win pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the ready-to-win pattern. You should do it like this. The numerical data indicating the random number for determining the ready-to-win pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . Following step 66AKS023, it is determined whether or not the determined ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step 66AKS024). At this time, if the decorative symbol corresponds to a number other than 7 (step 66AKS024; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated.

If the ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step 66AKS024; Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a setting suggesting effect according to whether or not the setting suggesting effect is to be executed (step 66AKS025). Whether or not the setting suggestion effect is to be executed is determined by referring to a setting suggestion effect execution decision table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution. You can do so. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . As the presence/absence of the setting suggesting effect, one of "no effect" in which the setting suggesting effect is not executed, or "with effect" in which the setting suggesting effect is executed is determined.

Based on the determination result of step 66AKS025, it is determined whether or not it is determined to "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect (step 66AKS026). If it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is not executed, ie, "no effect" (step 66AKS026; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. If it is determined that there is an effect (step 66AKS026; Yes), the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is specified (step 66AKS027). The effect control CPU 120 may receive a setting value notification command transmitted from the main substrate 11 side when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and store the notified setting value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 . Accordingly, in step 66AKS027, the setting value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step 66AKS027, the suggested setting pattern is determined (step 66AKS028), and then the stop symbol determination process is terminated. The suggested setting pattern is determined by referring to a suggested setting pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating random values for determining the suggested setting pattern. It should be determined by The numerical data indicating the random number value for setting suggestion pattern determination may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

FIG. 12-3 shows a setting example regarding the ready-to-win symbol determination table of the characteristic portion 66AK. In the characteristic portion 66AK, a determination table 66AKT01 shown in FIG. 12-3 is prepared in advance as a ready-to-win symbol determination table. At step 66AKS023 of the stop symbol determination process, a decoration symbol that is a ready-to-win symbol is determined by referring to the determination table 66AKT01. In the determination table 66AKT01, the number of determination values assigned to decorative symbols serving as ready-to-win symbols differs depending on whether the variable display result is "loss" or "big hit". For example, when the variable display result is "losing", 80 judgment values are assigned to the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1, 70 judgment values are assigned to the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 2, 60 judgment values are assigned to the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 3, 50 judgment values are assigned to the decoration design corresponding to the number 4, and 40 judgment values are assigned to the decoration design corresponding to the number 5. is assigned, 30 determination values are assigned to the decoration design corresponding to the number 6, and 20 determination values are assigned to the decoration design corresponding to the number 7. When the variable display result is a "big hit", 20 determination values are assigned to the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 1, 30 determination values are assigned to the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 2, and 3. 40 judgment values are assigned to the decoration design corresponding to the number of , 50 judgment values are assigned to the decoration design corresponding to the number 4, and 60 judgment values are allocated to the decoration design corresponding to the number 5. 70 judgment values are assigned to the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 6, and 80 judgment values are assigned to the decoration design corresponding to the number 7.

According to the settings in the table 66AKT01 shown in FIG. 12-3, when the variable display result is "losing", the determination ratio of the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, and the number 2, the number 3, and the number 4 are the highest. As the numbers of 1, 5, and 6 are reached, the ratio of determining the decorative pattern becomes lower, and the ratio of determining the decorative pattern corresponding to the number of 7 becomes the lowest. When the variable display result is a "big hit", the decision rate of the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, and the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, and the number 6 are obtained. Accordingly, the determination ratio of the decorative pattern increases, and the determination ratio of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 becomes the highest. Therefore, when the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as the ready-to-win pattern, the variable display result is "big win" and the ratio of control to the big win game state becomes the highest, the number 6 and the number 5. , number 4, number 3, and number 2, the variable display result becomes "big hit" when stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win pattern, and the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state decreases, and the number 1 becomes the number 1. When the corresponding decoration pattern is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win pattern, the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the ratio of control to the big win game state becomes the lowest.

FIG. 12-4 shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion effect execution determination table of the characteristic portion 66AK. In the characteristic portion 66AK, a table 66AKT02 shown in FIG. 12-4 is prepared in advance as a setting suggestion effect determination table. At step 66AKS025 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the determination table 66AKT02. In the determination table 66AKT02, the number of determination values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether the variable display result is "losing" or "big win". For example, if the variable display result is "losing", 80 determination values are assigned to "no effect" that does not execute the setting suggestion effect, and 20 determination values are allocated to "with effect" that the setting suggestion effect is executed. is assigned. When the variable display result is a "big hit", 40 determination values are assigned to "no effect" that does not execute the setting suggestion effect, and 60 determination values are allocated to "with effect" that the setting suggestion effect is executed. assigned.

According to the setting in the table 66AKT02 shown in FIG. 12-4, when the variable display result is "loss", the determination ratio of "no effect" that does not execute the setting suggestion effect is changed to "with effect" that the setting suggestion effect is executed. higher than the determination ratio of When the variable display result is a ``jackpot'', the determination ratio of ``with performance'' to execute the setting suggestion performance is higher than the determination ratio of ``no performance'' to not perform the setting suggestion performance. Also, the setting suggesting effect is executed when the ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7. The percentage of the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7 being stop-displayed as the ready-to-win pattern is low when the variable display result is "loss" and high when the variable display result is "big hit". As a result, when the setting suggestion performance is executed, the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the ratio of control to the big win game state is higher than when the setting suggestion performance is not executed.

FIG. 12-5(A) shows a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. These setting suggestion patterns have different suggested contents depending on whether or not the symbol display color is to be changed, and the display color when it is to be changed. The symbol display color is a display color of a decorative symbol stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win symbol, and can be changed to suggestive display colors including copper color, silver color, and gold color in addition to the normal display color red. The pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color, suggesting that the player has a low expectation, which is an advantageous set value. Pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper, suggesting that the set value is 2 or more. Pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the player has a high degree of expectation, which is a set value that is advantageous to the player. Pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, suggesting confirmation of 6, which is the highest setting. In this way, in the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern, it is possible to suggest the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 according to whether or not the pattern display color has changed and the pattern display color after the change.

FIG. 12-5(B) shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion pattern determination table of the characteristic part 66AK. In the characteristic portion 66AK, a determination table 66AKT03 shown in FIG. 12-5(B) is prepared in advance as a setting suggestion pattern determination table. At step 66AKS027 of the stop symbol determination process, a suggested setting pattern is determined by referring to the determination table 66AKT03. In the determination table 66AKT03, there is a portion where the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. For example, if the set value is 1, 95 judgment values are assigned to pattern RE-0, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern RE-2, and pattern RE-1 and pattern RE-3 are assigned judgment values. No value assignment (0). When the set value is 2, 65 decision values are assigned to pattern RE-0, 30 decision values are assigned to pattern RE-1, and 5 decision values are assigned to pattern RE-2. , and pattern RE-3 have no decision value assigned (0 pieces). When the set value is 3, 65 decision values are assigned to pattern RE-0, 30 decision values are assigned to pattern RE-1, and 5 decision values are assigned to pattern RE-2. pattern RE-3 has no decision value assignment (0 pieces). When the set value is 4, 40 decision values are assigned to pattern RE-0, 30 decision values are assigned to pattern RE-1, and 30 decision values are assigned to pattern RE-2. pattern RE-3 has no decision value assignment (0 pieces). When the set value is 5, 40 determination values are assigned to pattern RE-0, 30 determination values are assigned to pattern RE-1, and 30 determination values are assigned to pattern RE-2. pattern RE-3 has no decision value assignment (0 pieces). When the set value is 6, 35 decision values are assigned to pattern RE-0, 30 decision values are assigned to pattern RE-1, and 30 decision values are assigned to pattern RE-2. , and five decision values are assigned to pattern RE-3.

In the characteristic part 66AK, when the setting suggesting effect using the ready-to-win pattern is executed, the ready-to-win pattern becomes a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, so that the ratio of control to the big win game state is high. When the setting suggesting effect is executed in pattern RE-0, the degree of expectation, which is a setting value advantageous to the player, is low, and when the setting suggesting effect is executed in pattern RE-1, the set value is 2 or more. Something is certain. In addition, when the setting suggesting performance is executed in the pattern RE-2, the degree of expectation, which is a set value advantageous to the player, is high, and when the setting suggesting performance is executed in the pattern RE-3, the set value is the highest. 6 is determined. In this way, the ready-to-win symbols when the variable display of decorative symbols is the ready-to-win mode include a symbol display mode for suggesting control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a symbol display mode for 7. A pattern display mode for suggesting the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 as well as suggesting the control of the jackpot game state such as decoration patterns corresponding to the numbers is included. When the ready-to-win pattern is a decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7, the ready-to-win pattern is displayed in the normal display color to suggest control of the jackpot game state, and then the pattern display color is changed. Suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state are continuously made, and suggestions regarding the set values are made.

In the characteristic portion 66AK, the setting suggestion effect can be executed so that the effect mode differs according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the suggested setting pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-1 in step 66AKS028 of the stop symbol determination process, so the symbol display color is copper. never changed. Thus, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, as a pattern display mode when the ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, the pattern display color is changed to copper color or not. When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 6, the pattern display color is changed to gold because the pattern RE-3 is not determined as the setting suggestion effect in step 66AKS028 of the stop symbol determination processing. never Thus, depending on whether the set value set in the pachinko game machine is 6 or not, the symbol display color is changed to gold as the symbol display mode when the ready-to-win symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. It depends on whether or not it is changed to

In the stop symbol determination process, when it is determined in step 66AKS024 that the ready-to-win symbol is a decoration symbol corresponding to the number 7, step 66AKS027 specifies the set value, and then step 66AKS025 may be performed. In step 66AKS025, the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect may be determined not only by the variable display result but also by a different ratio according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. In this case, if the set value is advantageous for the player, it may be determined that the setting suggestion effect is executed at a high rate. When the ready-to-win pattern is determined to be the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, it may be determined that the variable display result is "big win" and the game is controlled to the big win game state. Even if the ready-to-win pattern is not a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, the setting suggestion performance may be executed at a predetermined ratio. In this case, if the ready-to-win symbol is a decoration symbol corresponding to the number 7, it may be determined that the setting suggestion effect is executed at a high rate. In this way, when the mode of variable display of decorative symbols is the ready-to-win mode, setting suggesting effects may be executed at different ratios according to a plurality of types of ready-to-win modes.

The setting suggesting effect is to change the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decoration symbol stopped and displayed as the ready-to-win symbol, instead of changing the symbol display color, or in addition to changing the symbol display color. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape and pattern of the decoration pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, the display of a background image, an outer frame image, and other arbitrary effect images, the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, the operation of the movable members for effects, and the like. It may be a combination of some or all of which may change the rendering mode of any rendering device.

The plurality of suggested setting patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when the game is controlled to the big win game state, and a pattern that can be determined even when the game is not controlled to the big win game state. For example, pattern RE-0 and pattern RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined rate even when the variable display result is "loss", whereas pattern RE-2 and pattern RE-3 are variable display It may be possible to make the decision possible only when the result is a "big hit" and to make the decision impossible when the variable display result is a "loss". In this case, the pattern RE-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern RE-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the setting values used.

FIG. 12-6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 66AKS012 of the variable display start setting process as the advance notice effect determination process. In the advance notice effect determination process, presence/absence of effect according to whether or not to execute the notice effect and the type of effect to be executed are determined (step 66AKS041). The presence or absence of the effect and the type of effect are determined by referring to a table for determining the type of effect for the effect previously stored in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the type of the effect for the effect. You can do it like this. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the type of announcement effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . At step 66AKS041, it is determined to be "no notice" for not executing the notice effect, or "step up", "character", or "title" for executing the notice effect.

Among the notice effects that can be executed by the pachinko machine 1, for example, a step-up notice corresponding to the "step-up" effect type, a character notice corresponding to the "character" effect type, and a "title" effect type It is sufficient if the corresponding title notice is included. In the step-up notice, for example, the effect mode of the notice effect, such as the display of the effect image on the image display device 5, is changed stepwise from one step to a plurality of steps. The effect mode to be changed in the step-up notice is not limited to the display of the effect image on the image display device 5, but the output of the sound by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 and the lighting of the light-emitting members such as the decorative LED, and the movement of the effect. It may include movement of members, or a combination of some or all of these. In the step-up notice, after the effect in the first effect mode is executed, the effect may end without changing the effect mode. In this embodiment, when the step-up notice is executed, during the execution of the variable display of the decoration pattern, in the display area of the effect image surrounded by the display frame that is the outer frame of the rectangular shape of the predetermined display color, The effect display for displaying the display contents (display mode) of the effect image showing the character in a switchable manner according to a predetermined order changes the effect mode to a plurality of stages to perform a step-up effect. The effect image displayed when the step-up notice is executed includes an outer-frame partial image showing the display frame and an inner-frame partial image used for switching display in step change. The in-frame partial image may be a still image that is still displayed at each stage of the step change, or may be a moving image that is displayed as an animation at each step of the step change.

In the character announcement, an effect image showing a predetermined character is displayed on the image display device 5 . The character notice is controlled to a big win game state according to the type, size, color, pattern, action, dialogue of the character, or a combination of some or all of them (big win expectation). are performed differently. In the title announcement, a title is displayed on the image display device 5 using a predetermined character image. The advance notice of the title is controlled to a jackpot game state in accordance with the effect mode including the content, size, color, pattern, display timing, display period, display update speed of the title, or a combination of some or all of these. It is executed so that the ratio (jackpot expectation) is different.

Based on the determination result of step 66AKS041, it is determined whether or not "no notice", in which the notice effect is not executed, is decided (step 66AKS042). If it is determined to be "no notice" (step 66AKS042; Yes), the notice effect determination process is terminated. If it is not "no notice" (step 66AKS042; No), it is determined whether or not "step-up" corresponding to step-up notice is determined (step 66AKS043). If "character" or "title" other than "step up" is determined (step 66AKS043; No), an effect pattern corresponding to "character" or "title" is determined (step 66AKS044). The effect patterns of the character notice and the title notice are obtained by referring to a notice effect pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating random numbers for deciding the notice effect patterns. Any one of the effect patterns may be determined. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the announcement effect pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

When the effect type of the advance notice effect is determined to be "step up" (step 66AKS043; Yes), the step number pattern is determined (step 66AKS045). The step number pattern is an effect pattern corresponding to the number of steps as the number of steps for changing the effect mode in the step-up notice. The step number pattern is determined by referring to a step number pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the step number pattern. It should be determined by The numerical data indicating the random number for determining the step number pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . In this embodiment, five patterns SU-1 to SU-5 are provided as a plurality of step number patterns, and the number of steps is one of 1 to 5 according to each pattern.

Based on the determination result of step 66AKS045, it is determined whether pattern SU-5 is determined (step 66AKS046). If a step number pattern other than pattern SU-5 is determined (step 66AKS046; No), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated. When the pattern SU-5 is determined (step 66AKS046; Yes), the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is specified (step 66AKS047). The effect control CPU 120 may receive a setting value notification command transmitted from the main substrate 11 side when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and store the notified setting value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 . Accordingly, in step 66AKS047, the set value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step 66AKS047, after the outer frame display pattern is determined (step 66AKS048), the advance notice effect determination processing is terminated. The outer frame display pattern corresponds to whether or not to change the display color of the outer frame partial image when the number of steps for changing the effect mode in the step-up notice reaches 5, and to the outer frame display color if changed. This is a production pattern. The outer frame display pattern is determined by referring to a prepared outer frame display pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the outer frame display pattern. Any one of the patterns may be determined. The numerical data indicating the random number for determining the outer frame display pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

FIG. 12-7 shows a setting example regarding the advance notice effect type determination table of the characteristic portion 66AK. In the characteristic portion 66AK, a determination table 66AKT04 shown in FIG. 12-7 is prepared in advance as the announcement effect type determination table. At step 66AKS041 of the notice effect determination process, the presence or absence of the notice effect effect and the effect type are determined by referring to the determination table 66AKT04. In the decision table 66AKT04, depending on whether the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", "normal (losing)", "super (losing)", or "big hit", it is assigned to a production type or the like. The number of judgment values is different.

The variable display content can be specified based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 and the display result of the variable display indicated by the variable display result notification command. When the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", the form of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win form, and the determined decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, resulting in the display result of the variable display. is "losing". When the variable display content is "normal (losing)", after the mode of the variable display of the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach is executed, and then the fixed decorative pattern of the ready-to-lose combination is stopped and displayed. As a result, the display result of the variable display becomes "loss". When the variable display content is "super (losing)", after the mode of variable display of the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the ready-to-win effect of super-reach is executed, and then the fixed decorative pattern of the winning-to-lose combination is stopped and displayed. As a result, the display result of the variable display becomes "loss". When the variable display content is "big hit", after the mode of variable display of the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the ready-to-win performance of normal reach or super reach is executed, and then the determined decoration pattern of the big win combination is stopped and displayed. Then, the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit".

In the determination table 66AKT04, for example, for the effect types of "character" and "title", no determination value is assigned (0 pieces) when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)". On the other hand, when the variable display content is "normal (loss)", 10 determination values are assigned to the "character" effect type, and when the variable display content is "super (loss)" 50 determination values are assigned to both the "character" and "title" production types, and when the variable display content is "jackpot", 70 determination values and the "title" are assigned to the "character" production type. 100 determination values are assigned to each effect type, and there is allocation of determination values. 30 judgment values are assigned to the "step-up" notice type when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", and when the variable display content is other than "non-reach (loss)" 120 decision values are assigned. For the production type of "Title", there is no judgment value assigned (0) when the variable display content is "Non-Reach (Loss)" or "Normal (Loss)", and the variable display content is "Super (Loss)". )”, 50 determination values are assigned, and 100 determination values are assigned when the variable display content is “jackpot”. As a result, depending on whether the performance type is "step-up" or "title", the degree of expectation for big wins corresponding to the ratio of control to the big win game state is different. More specifically, even if the variable display content is other than "jackpot", the "step up" effect type is assigned a larger judgment value than the "title" effect type, so the variable display content is Even cases other than "jackpot" are likely to be determined at a relatively high rate. On the other hand, as for the effect type of "title", if the variable display contents are other than "jackpot", only 50 determination values are assigned in the case of "super (losing)", and "step Since a smaller determination value is assigned than the effect type of "up", when the variable display result is other than "big hit", it is determined at a relatively low rate. Therefore, when the title notice is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the step-up notice is executed. According to a similar comparison with respect to the presence or absence of the effect of the notice effect and the number of judgment values assigned to the effect type, when the title notice is executed, the expectation of the big hit is higher than when the character notice is executed. . When the character announcement is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the step-up announcement is executed. When the step-up notice is executed, the degree of expectation for big win becomes higher than when the notice performance is not executed.

FIG. 12-8(A) shows a configuration example of a step number pattern. The plurality of step number patterns differ from each other in the number of steps for changing the effect mode in the step-up notice. More specifically, the pattern SU-1 has 1 step, the pattern SU-2 has 2 steps, the pattern SU-3 has 3 steps, the pattern SU-4 has 4 steps, and the pattern SU-5 has five steps. In the step-up notice, the effect by the first effect mode is the effect of the 1st step, and each time the effect mode is changed thereafter, the number of steps increases by one step from the effect of the 2nd step to the effect of the 5th step. proceed.

FIG. 12-8(B) shows a setting example regarding the step number pattern determination table of the characteristic portion 66AK. In the characteristic portion 66AK, a determination table 66AKT05 shown in FIG. 12-8B is prepared in advance as a step number pattern determination table. At step 66AKS045 of the advance notice effect determination process, the step number pattern is determined by referring to the determination table 66AKT05. In the decision table 66AKT05, depending on whether the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", "normal (losing)", "super (losing)", or "big hit", the decision result of the step number pattern is determined. The number of assigned judgment values is different. By comparing the number of judgment values assigned to each step number pattern for each variable display content, in the step-up notice, as the step number increases from 1 to 3, the degree of expectation for a big win increases. Pattern SU-4 and pattern SU-5 are assigned no determination value (zero) when the variable display contents are other than "big win". Therefore, in the step-up notice, when the number of steps reaches 4 or 5, it is determined that the jackpot game state is controlled. In this way, in the step-up notice, as the number of steps in which the performance mode is changed in stages increases, the ratio of control to the big win game state increases.

FIG. 12-9(A) shows a configuration example of the outer frame display pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns SC-0 to SC-3 are provided as a plurality of outer frame display patterns. These outer frame display patterns have different suggestive contents according to the outer frame display color when the number of steps in the step-up notice reaches 5, which is the fifth step. The outer frame display color is the display color of the outer frame partial image displayed in the step-up notice, and in addition to the normal display color white, it can be changed to suggestive display colors including copper, silver, and gold. . Pattern SC-0 does not change the display color of the outer frame, suggesting that the player has a low expectation, which is an advantageous set value. Pattern SC-1 changes the outer frame display color to copper, suggesting that the set value is 2 or more. Pattern SC-2 changes the display color of the outer frame to silver, suggesting that the player has a high degree of expectation, which is a set value that is advantageous to the player. Pattern SC-3 changes the outer frame display color to gold, suggesting that 6, which is the highest setting value, is established. In this way, in the fifth step in the step-up notice, it is possible to suggest the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 according to whether or not the outer frame display color has changed and the changed outer frame display color. .

FIG. 12-9(B) shows a setting example regarding the outer frame display pattern determination table of the characteristic portion 66AK. In the characteristic portion 66AK, a determination table 66AKT06 shown in FIG. 12-9B is prepared in advance as an outer frame display pattern determination table. At step 66AKS048 of the advance notice effect determination process, the outer frame display pattern is determined by referring to the determination table 66AKT06. In the determination table 66AKT06, there is a portion where the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the outer frame display pattern differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. For example, if the set value is 1, 95 judgment values are assigned to pattern SC-0, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern SC-2, and 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern SC-1 and pattern SC-3. No value assignment (0). When the set value is 2, 65 decision values are assigned to pattern SC-0, 30 decision values are assigned to pattern SC-1, and 5 decision values are assigned to pattern SC-2. , and pattern SC-3 have no determination value assignment (0 pieces). When the set value is 3, 65 decision values are assigned to pattern SC-0, 30 decision values are assigned to pattern SC-1, and 5 decision values are assigned to pattern SC-2. Pattern SC-3 has no decision value assigned (0 pieces). When the set value is 4, 40 decision values are assigned to pattern SC-0, 30 decision values are assigned to pattern SC-1, and 30 decision values are assigned to pattern SC-2. Pattern SC-3 has no decision value assigned (0 pieces). When the set value is 5, 40 decision values are assigned to pattern SC-0, 30 decision values are assigned to pattern SC-1, and 30 decision values are assigned to pattern SC-2. Pattern SC-3 has no decision value assigned (0 pieces). When the set value is 6, 35 decision values are assigned to pattern SC-0, 30 decision values are assigned to pattern SC-1, and 30 decision values are assigned to pattern SC-2. and five decision values are assigned to pattern SC-3.

In the characteristic portion 66AK, when the display color of the outer frame partial image is changed in the step-up notice, the effect mode is changed up to the fifth step in which the number of steps in the step-up notice is 5, so that the jackpot game state is controlled. be confirmed. When the outer frame display color does not change according to the pattern SC-0, the set value is low, which is an advantageous set value for the player. is greater than or equal to 2. In addition, when the outer frame display color is changed to silver by pattern SC-2, the degree of expectation is high, which is an advantageous set value for the player, and when the outer frame display color is changed to gold by pattern SC-3, It is determined that 6 is the highest setting. In this way, the plurality of stages in the case of changing the effect mode step by step in the step-up notice include a notification stage for notifying that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot game state such as the fourth step when the number of steps is four; and a suggesting step of suggesting a set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, such as the fifth step when the number of steps is five. After changing to the performance mode of the fourth step, the performance mode is changed to the fifth step, so that after changing the performance mode to the notification stage, the performance mode is changed to the suggesting stage.

In the characteristic portion 66AK, it is possible to perform the fifth step in the step-up notice differently depending on the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the pattern SC-1 is not determined as the outer frame display pattern in step 66AKS048 of the advance notice effect determination process, so the outer frame display color is copper. It never changes color. As described above, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1, it is determined whether or not the outer frame display color is changed to copper as the effect mode of the fifth step. different. If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 6, the outer frame display pattern is not determined to be the pattern SC-3 in step 66AKS048 of the advance notice effect determination processing, so the outer frame display color is gold. never changed. As described above, depending on whether the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6 or not, whether or not the outer frame display color is changed to gold differs as the effect mode of the fifth step.

In the advance notice effect determination process, when it is determined as "step-up advance notice" in step 66AKS043, the set value may be specified in step 66AKS047, and then the process may proceed to step 66AKS045. In step 66AKS045, the step number pattern may be determined not only by the variable display content but also by a different ratio according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In this case, if the set value is advantageous for the player, the step number pattern may be determined so that the number of steps increases at a high rate. Even when pattern SU-4 or pattern SU-5 is determined, the variable display result may be "losing" at a predetermined rate, and the jackpot game state may not be controlled. Even when a step number pattern other than the pattern SU-5 is determined, the outer frame display pattern may be determined at a predetermined ratio. In this case, if the step number pattern is pattern SU-5, the outer frame display pattern other than pattern SC-0 may be determined at a high rate. In this way, when the advance notice effect that is the step-up notice is executed, even if the effect mode can be changed to suggest the set value by a different ratio according to the number of steps as the number of steps for changing the effect mode. good.

The effect mode suggesting the set value in the fifth step of the step-up notice is to change the outer frame display color, which is the display color of the outer frame partial image, instead of changing the outer frame display color. In addition, the shape and pattern of the outer frame partial image, the shape, pattern and color of the inner frame partial image, the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of the light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the production Any effect mode in the step-up notice may be changed, such as the operation of the movable member, or a combination of some or all of them.

The plurality of outer frame display patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when controlled to the big win game state and a pattern that can be determined even when not controlled to the big win game state. For example, pattern SC-0 and pattern SC-1 can be determined at a predetermined rate even when the variable display result is "loss", while pattern SC-2 and pattern SC-3 are variable display. It may be possible to make the decision possible only when the result is a "big hit" and to make the decision impossible when the variable display result is a "loss". In this case, the pattern SC-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern SC-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the setting values used.

FIG. 12-10 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display regarding the characteristic portion 66AK. In the variable display production process, for example, based on the timer value of the production control process timer, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed (step 66AKS061). At this time, the timer value of the production control process timer is updated (for example, 1 subtraction), and when the end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value after the update, the variable display time It should be judged that it has passed. When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 66AKS061; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step 66AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, off, or blinked. It is sufficient that various effects can be executed by a predetermined effect device by operating the movable member for effect, or by combining some or all of them.

In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 12-10, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice effect period (step 66AKS062). The notice effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (such as the notice effect control pattern) determined in step 66AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, for example. When it is determined that it is the advance notice effect period (step 66AKS062; Yes), control is performed to execute the notice effect (step 66AKS063). When the step-up notice is executed by the control of step 66AKS063, the notice effect of changing the effect mode step by step can be executed as a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state. Further, when the number of steps of the step-up notice is 5, the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 can be suggested by changing the outer frame display color to a changeable fifth step effect mode. .

If it is not the notice effect period (step 66AKS062; No), or after performing the control of step 66AKS063, it is determined whether or not it is the ready-to-win effect period (step 66AKS064). Reach effect period, for example in the effect control pattern (special figure fluctuation time effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 66AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, it may be determined in advance. When it is determined that it is the ready-to-win effect period (step 66AKS064; Yes), control to execute the ready-to-win effect is performed (step 66AKS065). The control of step 66AKS065 makes it possible to suggest the control of the jackpot game state by executing, for example, normal reach or super reach effects. In addition, when the decoration pattern to be the ready-to-win pattern is stopped and displayed, the ratio of control to the big-win game state can be varied according to the ready-to-win game state as a suggestion for the control of the big win game state. At this time, when the ready-to-win pattern is a decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7, the ready-to-win performance after the change of the pattern display color is executed to continuously suggest the control of the jackpot game state and pachinko. New suggestions regarding the setting values of the gaming machine 1 can be made.

If it is not the ready-to-win effect period (step 66AKS064; No), or after performing the control of step 66AKS065, it is determined whether or not it is the change effect period (step 66AKS066). The change effect period may be determined in advance as an effect execution period for changing the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern is executed. When it is determined that it is the change effect period (step 66AKS066; Yes), control to execute the change effect is performed (step 66AKS067).

If it is not a change effect period (step 66AKS066; No), after performing the control of step 66AKS067, for example, based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, other variations of the decorative pattern After performing the control for executing the effect during the variable display including the display operation (step 66AKS068), the effect processing during the variable display is terminated.

When it is determined at step 66AKS061 that the variable display time has elapsed (step 66AKS061; Yes), it is determined whether or not a pattern confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step 66AKS069). At this time, if the pattern confirmation command is not received (step 66AKS069; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the game waits. After the variable display time elapses, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving the design confirmation command, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the fact that the design confirmation command could not be received normally. You may do so. When the pattern confirmation command is received (step 66AKS069; Yes), for example, a predetermined display control command is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, which results in a variable display of the decorative pattern. Control for deriving and displaying the final stop symbol (determined decorative symbol) is performed (step 66AKS070). Subsequently, a certain period of time is set in advance as a wait time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step 66AKS071). Also, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3" corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step 66AKS072), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

FIGS. 12-11 show execution periods and execution timings of various effects during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbols with respect to the characterizing portion 66AK. Among them, FIG. 12-11(A) shows the execution period and the execution timing of the variable display-related effect including the mode of variable display of decorative symbols. FIG. 12-11 (B1) shows the symbol display colors when the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win symbols is not executed. FIG. 12-11 (B2) shows the symbol display colors when the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win symbols is executed. FIG. 12-11(C) shows the execution period and execution timing of the advance notice effect that is the step-up advance notice. FIG. 12-11(D) shows the execution period, the performance time, and the content of the performance corresponding to the execution step for the advance notice effect that is the step-up notice.

When the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern is not executed, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started at the timing T0, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win state at the timing T1, and the timing is established. The pattern display color is maintained in the normal display color until the variable display of the decoration pattern is completed at timing T3 through the development of the ready-to-win performance that shifts from the ready-to-win performance of the normal reach to the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win at T2. In this case, when the ready-to-win state is established at the timing T1, the decoration pattern stopped and displayed as the ready-to-win pattern is controlled to the jackpot game state depending on which of the numbers 1 to 7 corresponds to the decoration pattern. different percentages. In this way, by setting the decorative symbols stopped and displayed as ready-to-win symbols to the decorative symbols corresponding to any of the numbers 1 to 7, it is possible to suggest the control of the big win game state.

When the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern is executed, for example, after the ready-to-win effect develops from the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach to the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win at timing T2, the change effect is executed, and the pattern display color changes to the normal display color. to the suggestive display color. However, in the case of the setting suggestion pattern RE-0, the symbol display color does not change even when the change effect is executed. When the change performance is executed and the pattern display color can be changed, the decoration pattern stopped and displayed as the ready-to-win pattern is the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7, so that the ratio of control to the big win game state. suggests that the In addition, setting values advantageous to the player are set according to whether or not the pattern display color of the ready-to-win pattern is changed when the change effect is executed, and the suggestive display color when changed. Different percentages. In this way, when the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 as the ready-to-win pattern is stopped and displayed, the effect that can be executed in a period after a specific timing, such as the period after the timing T2 in which the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win can be executed, By making it possible to change the symbol display color of the ready-to-win symbol by the change performance, it is possible to continuously suggest the control of the jackpot game state and to suggest the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

Since the ready-to-win pattern is stop-displayed when the ready-to-win is established at the timing T1, in a specific period after the timing T1, the decoration pattern stopped and displayed as the ready-to-win pattern can suggest the control of the jackpot game state. . Then, when the ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, the ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to a number other than 7 as a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state until timing T2 in the specific period. It suggests that it is controlled to a big hit game state at a higher rate than. Thereafter, after the timing T2 in the specific period, when the change effect is executed, the pachinko game machine 1 determines whether or not the symbol display color of the ready-to-win symbol is changed, and the suggestive display color when changed. Suggestions are made as to the setting value of . Further, even when the change performance is executed, the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7 as the ready-to-win pattern is continuously stopped and displayed, so that the suggestion regarding the control of the big winning game state can be continuously performed. In this way, when the ready-to-win effect of normal reach or super reach is executed, the ready-to-win effect of normal reach can be executed in a specific period from timing T1 when ready-to-win is established to timing T2 to develop ready-to-win. Suggestion to be controlled to the big win game state can be made at different ratios according to the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed. After that, until the timing T3 when the variable display ends after the timing T2, if the ready-to-win pattern is a decoration pattern corresponding to a number other than 7, the suggestion to be controlled to the big win game state is continued at a rate corresponding to the ready-to-win pattern. If the ready-to-win pattern is a decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7, the suggestion to be controlled to the big win game state is continuously performed at a rate corresponding to the ready-to-win pattern, and pachinko is performed according to the pattern display color of the ready-to-win pattern. Suggestions regarding the setting values of the gaming machine 1 are made. The period from timing T1 at which ready-to-win establishment is established to timing T3 at which the variable display ends is defined as a specific period in which the ready-to-win effect can be executed, and during this specific period from timing T1 to timing T2, a big hit is achieved at a rate corresponding to the ready-to-win pattern. Suggestion to be controlled to the game state is performed, and after timing T2 to timing T3, the suggestion to be controlled to the big hit game state is continuously performed at a rate corresponding to the ready-to-win pattern, and a big hit at a rate to the ready-to-win pattern. A case may be provided in which the suggestion to be controlled in the game state is continuously performed and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested in accordance with the symbol display color of the ready-to-win symbol.

When the advance notice performance as the step-up advance notice is executed, after the variable display of the decoration pattern is started at timing T0, the execution of the step-up advance notice is started, the first step is performed in the period D11, and the step-up advance notice is performed in the period D12. It becomes the second step, the third step in the period D13, the fourth step in the period D14, and the fifth step in the period D15. In this case, as a step-up notice, the display of the frame-inside partial image changes stepwise from the first step to the fifth step. However, when the number of steps corresponding to the determination result of the step number pattern is reached, the execution of the step-up notice is terminated without changing to the effect mode of the next step.

The first step to the third step in periods D11 to D13 all have a performance time of 1 second, and are executed before the state of the variable display of the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win state at the timing T1, and the jackpot is won. It becomes a big hit notice that suggests the control of the game state. When the step number pattern is the pattern SU-1, the first step in the period D11 is started, and when the first step in the period D11 ends after one second of the presentation time has passed, the step-up notice is executed. also ends. When the step number pattern is the pattern SU-2, after the first step in the period D11 is completed as in the case of the pattern SU-1, the display of the partial image inside the frame is changed, and the display is changed to the period D12. When the second step in period D12 ends after one second of the performance time has elapsed, execution of the step-up notice also ends. When the step number pattern is the pattern SU-3, when the second step in the period D12 is completed in the same manner as in the case of the pattern SU-2, the display of the partial image inside the frame is changed, and the period D13 is changed. When the third step in period D13 ends after one second of the performance time has elapsed, execution of the step-up notice also ends.

The fourth step in the period D14 is executed after the performance time becomes 5 seconds longer than 1 second, and the state of the variable display of the decoration pattern is the ready-to-win state at the timing T1, and the ready-to-win state is established, and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. It becomes a big hit determination that definitely informs that it will be done. When the step number pattern is the pattern SU-4, after finishing up to the third step in the period D13 as in the case of the pattern SU-3, reach is established at the timing T1, and then the frame partial image is displayed. The display or the like is changed to start the fourth step in the period D14, and when the fourth step in the period D14 ends after five seconds of presentation time has passed, the execution of the step-up notice also ends.

The 5th step in the period D15 is executed after the ready-to-reach development in which the performance time becomes 10 seconds longer than 1 second or 5 seconds, and the ready-to-reach performance of the normal reach is shifted to the ready-to-reach performance of the super reach at the timing T2, It becomes a big win determination that definitely notifies that the control to the big win game state is performed, and additionally, it becomes a set value suggestion that makes a suggestion about the set value of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加When the step number pattern is the pattern SU-5, after finishing up to the fourth step in the period D14 as in the case of the pattern SU-4, reach development occurs at the timing T2, followed by the in-frame partial image. The display and the like are changed, and the fifth step is started in period D15. At this time, depending on which of the patterns SC-0 to SC-3 the outer frame display pattern is, whether or not to change the outer frame display color as the display mode of the outer frame partial image, and when to change Suggestion of different display colors. After the fifth step in the period D15 is thus started, the performance time of 10 seconds has elapsed, and when the fifth step in the period D15 ends, the execution of the step-up notice also ends.

Since the step-up notice can change the presentation mode up to the third step before the ready-to-win state is established at timing T1, in the specific period after timing T0 in which the step-up notice can be executed, up to timing T1 Depending on whether the execution of the step-up notice ends or continues to the next step, it is possible to make a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state. Then, when the number of steps of the step-up notice is 4 or more, in a period D14 included from the timing T1 to the timing T2 in the specific period, as a suggestion regarding the control of the big win game state, a fourth announcement of the big win determination is made. It is possible to change the performance mode of the step. Furthermore, when the number of steps of the step-up notice is 5, in a period D15 included after the timing T2 in the specific period, as a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1, an outer frame according to the outer frame display pattern is displayed. It is possible to change to the presentation mode of the fifth step, which is the display color.

If the step number pattern corresponds to any of patterns SU-1 to SU-4 and the number of steps is less than 5, step up is performed before changing to the fifth step effect mode in period D15. Execution of the notice ends. Therefore, when the step-up notice is executed, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state is made until the timing T2 in the specific period corresponding to the number of steps being less than 5, and then the suggestion is terminated. ing. On the other hand, when the step number pattern corresponds to the pattern SU-5 and the number of steps is 5, the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is changed by changing to the effect mode of the fifth step in the period D15. make suggestions about Therefore, when the step-up notice is executed, the effect that can be executed after the timing T2 after the control regarding the control of the jackpot game state is performed until the timing T2 in the specific period corresponding to the number of steps of 5. , a case where suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state are continuously made and suggestions regarding the set values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are included.

When the advance notice performance of the step-up notice is executed, the performance mode is changed from the first step to the third step in a specific period from the timing T0 at which the variable display is started to the timing T1 at which the ready-to-win state is established. , and it is possible to suggest control to a big hit game state at a rate corresponding to the number of steps in which the performance mode is changed. After that, after the timing T1 until the timing T2 when the ready-to-win situation develops, if the effect mode is changed to the fourth step, it is possible to suggest that the control to the jackpot game state is established. Further, after the timing T2 until the timing T3 when the variable display ends, if the effect mode is changed to the fifth step, it is suggested that the control to the jackpot game state is confirmed, and the outer frame of the outer frame partial image is suggested. A setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested according to the display color. Note that the period from timing T0 at which the variable display starts to timing T3 at which the variable display ends is defined as a specific period during which the advance notice effect, which is the step-up notice, can be executed. Suggestion to be controlled to the jackpot game state is performed at a rate corresponding to the number of steps in which the mode is changed, and the suggestion ends without changing to the performance mode of the fifth step until timing T3 after timing T2; A case may be provided in which the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state is continuously made by changing to the presentation mode of the fifth step, and the suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is made according to the presentation mode of the fifth step. .

In the step-up notice, each step from the first step to the third step has a performance time of 1 second, the fourth step has a performance time of 5 seconds, and the fifth step has a performance time of 10 seconds. In the step-up notice, the plurality of stages for changing the performance mode step by step include a notification stage for notifying that control to the big win game state is performed as in the fourth step, and a pachinko game machine 1 as in the fifth step. and a suggesting step of suggesting a set value for . Since the presentation time of the fifth step is set to be longer than the presentation time of the fourth step, the suggestion stage has a longer execution period than the notification stage. In general, when an effect (advantageous effect) is executed, the player shoots an image or video of the effect with a portable terminal owned by the player, and sends it to SNS (Social There is a tendency to post on membership registration websites such as Networking Service and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, there arises a problem that an appropriate photographing time cannot be secured. On the other hand, the effect (unfavorable effect) that is often performed even in a disadvantageous situation does not arouse the desire to shoot, so if the execution period of the disadvantageous effect is long, the player will rather feel uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, in the characteristic part 66AK, the execution period for advantageous effects is lengthened to secure the photographing time, and the execution period for disadvantageous effects is made shorter than that for advantageous effects to reduce discomfort. In the step-up notice of the characteristic part 66AK, the presentation time of the 4th step for confirming the big win is longer than the presentation time from the 1st step to the 3rd step for the big win notice. Further, the presentation time of the fifth step, in which the big win is determined and the set value is suggested, is longer than the presentation time of the fourth step. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the presentation mode of the fifth step of suggesting the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1, and to secure the photographing time. In addition, since the photographing time can be secured, the photographed images and moving images are made public by the players on the Internet, and public interest in the pachinko game machine 1 can be heightened. In addition, in many cases, since the images including which pachinko game machine 1 in which game hall were photographed are disclosed, from the game hall side, the game hall is advertised by the player. become. In this way, by securing the photographing time when the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the player but also to the game arcade side.

The presentation time of the fifth step in the step-up notice may be varied according to a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. For example, pattern RE-0 has an effect time of 3 seconds, pattern RE-1 has an effect time of 7 seconds, pattern RE-2 has an effect time of 12 seconds, and pattern RE-3 has an effect time of 15 seconds. A rendering time corresponding to each pattern may be set so as to be seconds. In this manner, the execution period of the effect may be varied according to the effect mode when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested. The execution period may be longer in the case of a performance mode with a high degree of advantage for the player than in the case of a mode with a low degree of advantage for the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking when the effect mode is changed to suggest that the setting value is advantageous, and to secure the shooting time.

In the setting suggestion performance using the ready-to-win pattern, the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 can be suggested by making it possible to change the symbol display color, which is the display color of the ready-to-win pattern. In the fifth step of the step-up notice, setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be suggested by making it possible to change the outer frame display color, which is the display color of the outer frame partial image. In this way, in the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern and the fifth step of the step-up notice, at least part of the target image whose display color can be changed, such as the symbol display color and the outer frame display color Suggestions regarding the set values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be made according to different presentation modes. On the other hand, both the symbol display color and the outer frame display color can be changed to suggestive display colors including copper, silver, and gold, and the settings of the pachinko game machine 1 can be set according to at least a part of the common presentation mode. It is sufficient to be able to make suggestions about values. The pattern display color and the outer frame display color may be changeable to mutually different suggestive display colors. Alternatively, while the symbol display color can be changed in the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern, the effect mode other than the display color may be changed in the fifth step of the step-up notice. In the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern, the effect mode other than the symbol display color may be changed, while in the fifth step of the step-up notice, the outer frame display color may be changed. In the setting suggesting effect using the ready-to-win pattern, the effect mode other than the symbol display color may be changed, and in the fifth step of the step-up notice, the effect mode other than the display color may be changed. In these cases, it is only necessary to suggest the setting of the pachinko game machine 1 by a completely different effect mode between the setting suggesting effect using the ready-to-win pattern and the fifth step of the step-up notice.

The setting suggesting effect using the ready-to-win pattern may be executed at a timing different from the fifth step of the step-up notice. For example, after executing the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern, the effect mode may be changed to correspond to the fifth step of the step-up notice. Alternatively, the setting suggesting effect using the ready-to-win pattern may be executed after changing to the effect mode corresponding to the fifth step of the step-up notice. Thus, after the specific timing in the specific period, suggestions regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made at a plurality of timings. In this case, depending on the mode of execution of the suggestive effect at one timing, the mode of execution of the suggestive effect at other timings may be varied. As an example, the ratio of whether or not to change the effect mode up to the fifth step in the step-up notice may be varied depending on whether or not the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern is executed. When the suggestive effect at one timing is executed, the suggestive effect at other timings may be restricted so as not to be executed. For example, when the setting suggesting effect using the ready-to-win pattern is executed, the decision value in the decision table may be set so that the pattern SU-5 is not decided as the step number pattern of the step-up notice. . With such a setting, the step-up notice can change the production mode up to the fifth step at a predetermined ratio within a range where the setting suggestion production using the ready-to-win pattern is not executed, while the setting suggestion using the ready-to-win pattern can be changed. In the range in which the performance is executed, there is a limit as a limit that the performance mode is not changed until the fifth step. In addition, the step-up notice can change the production mode up to the fifth step at a high rate in the range where the setting suggestive effect using the ready-to-win pattern is not executed, while the setting suggestive effect using the ready-to-win pattern is executed. A limit may be provided as a limit to change the effect mode up to the fifth step at a low rate within the range. Alternatively, the relationship between ranges and limits may be interchanged. In other words, the step-up notice can change the effect mode up to the fifth step at a predetermined rate within the range in which the setting suggesting effect using the ready-to-win pattern is executed, while the setting suggesting effect using the ready-to-win pattern is executed. In the range where the effect is not changed, a restriction may be provided as a limit that the presentation mode is not changed until the fifth step. In addition, the step-up notice can change the production mode up to the 5th step at a high rate in the range where the setting suggestion production using the ready-to-win pattern is executed, while the setting suggestion production using the ready-to-win pattern is executed. To the extent that it is not possible, a limit may be provided as a limit to change the presentation mode up to the fifth step at a low rate.

The setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern may also be provided with the same restriction as in the case of the step-up notice. For example, the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern can be executed at a predetermined rate within the range where the step-up notice does not change the effect mode until the 5th step, while the step-up notice changes the effect mode until the 5th step. A limit may be set as a limit to the extent that the execution is not performed. In addition, the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern can be executed at a high rate within the range where the step-up notice does not change the effect mode until the 5th step, while the step-up notice changes the effect mode until the 5th step. A limit may be placed on the extent to which it is possible to perform at a lower rate. Alternatively, the relationship between ranges and limits may be interchanged. That is, the setting suggesting effect using the ready-to-win pattern can be executed at a predetermined rate within the range where the step-up notice changes the effect mode up to the fifth step, while the step-up notice changes the effect mode up to the fifth step. A limit may be provided as a limit to the extent that it is not allowed to be executed. In addition, the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern can be executed at a high rate within the range where the step-up notice changes the effect mode up to the 5th step, while the step-up notice changes the effect mode up to the 5th step. A limit may be provided as a limit to the extent that it is not allowed to be executed at a low rate.

In addition to the setting suggestion performance using the ready-to-win pattern and the fifth step in the step-up notice, a plurality of suggestion performances are executed at a plurality of timings for any suggestion performance that can suggest the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1. If possible, depending on the execution mode of the suggestive effect at one timing, the execution mode of the suggestive effect at other timings may be varied. Further, with regard to any suggestive effect that can suggest the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1, when a plurality of suggestive effects can be executed at a plurality of timings, according to the suggestive effect at one timing, at other timings. A restriction may be provided for the suggestive effect.

FIG. 12-12 shows an execution example of a setting suggestion effect using a ready-to-win pattern. FIG. 12-12(A) shows an effect execution example 66AK101 when the mode of variable display of decorative symbols is the ready-to-win mode and the ready-to-win is established. At this time, the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed in the ``left'' and ``right'' decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and the ready-to-win state is established, and the normal ready-to-win performance is executed. FIG. 12-12(B) shows an effect execution example 66AK102 in the case where the ready-to-win effect of normal reach becomes the ready-to-reach effect that shifts to the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. At this time, the decoration pattern is reduced and displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and the effect image in the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is displayed. FIG. 12-12(C) shows an effect execution example 66AK103 when a change effect is executed. At this time, an effect display corresponding to the change effect is displayed superimposed on the stop-displayed ready-to-win symbols, and an effect image notifying a message such as "Change the symbol display color!" A suggestion is made to change the symbol display color.

FIG. 12-12(D1) shows an effect execution example 66AK111 in which the symbol display color does not change, corresponding to the case where the suggested setting pattern is the pattern RE-0. FIG. 12-12(D2) shows an effect execution example 66AK112 in which the symbol display color is changed to copper in response to the setting suggestion pattern being the pattern RE-1. FIG. 12-12(D3) shows an effect execution example 66AK113 in which the symbol display color is changed to silver corresponding to the setting suggestion pattern being the pattern RE-2. FIG. 12-12 (D4) shows an effect execution example 66AK114 in which the symbol display color is changed to gold corresponding to the case where the suggested setting pattern is pattern RE-3. When the setting suggestion pattern is the pattern RE-0, the display color of the ready-to-win pattern does not change as in the effect execution example 66AK111, and remains red, which is the normal display color. As a result, a failure effect (fake effect) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the player's expectation, which is an advantageous set value, is low. When the setting suggesting pattern is the pattern RE-1, the display color of the ready-to-win pattern is changed to copper as in effect execution example 66AK112, thereby suggesting that the set value is 2 or more. When the setting suggestion pattern is the pattern RE-2, the display color of the ready-to-win pattern is changed to silver as in the effect execution example 66AK113, thereby indicating that the player has a high degree of expectation, which is a set value advantageous to the player. Suggest. When the setting suggesting pattern is the pattern RE-3, the display color of the ready-to-win pattern is changed to gold as in effect execution example 66AK114, thereby suggesting the determination of 6, which is the highest set value.

FIGS. 12-13 show an execution example of the advance notice effect that serves as a step-up advance notice. FIG. 12-13(A) shows an effect execution example 66AK201 in the first step of step-up notice. FIG. 12-13(B) shows an effect execution example 66AK202 in the second step of the step-up notice. FIG. 12-13(C) shows an effect execution example 66AK203 in the third step of the step-up notice. FIG. 12-13(D) shows an effect execution example 66AK204 in the fourth step of the step-up notice. FIGS. 12-13 (E1) to (E4) show production execution examples 66AK211 to 66AK214 in the fifth step of the step-up notice. In the production execution examples 66AK201 to 66AK204, corresponding to the first step to the fourth step, the characters displayed by the frame-inside partial images are switched in order to change the production mode step by step. In the production execution examples 66AK211 to 66AK214, corresponding to the fifth step, the characters displayed by the partial image inside the frame are switched to all the characters displayed from the first step to the fourth step, thereby changing the production mode. change.

Further, in the effect execution examples 66AK211 to 66AK214, the display color of the outer frame partial image can be changed according to the outer frame display pattern. In the effect execution example 66AK211 shown in FIG. 12-13 (E1), the outer frame display pattern corresponds to the pattern SC-0, the outer frame display color does not change, and the normal display color red remains unchanged. As a result, a failure effect (fake effect) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the player's expectation, which is an advantageous set value, is low. In the effect execution example 66AK212 shown in FIG. 12-13 (E2), the outer frame display pattern corresponds to the pattern SC-1, and the setting value is 2 or more by changing the outer frame display color to copper. suggesting confirmation of In the effect execution example 66AK213 shown in FIG. 12-13 (E3), the outer frame display pattern corresponds to the pattern SC-2, and the outer frame display color is changed to silver. suggesting high expectations. In the effect execution example 66AK214 shown in FIG. suggest confirmation.

In general, it becomes difficult to raise the player's expectation even more after the announcement of the control to the big win game state is made. On the other hand, the characterizing part 66AK makes a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state, and after a specific timing in a specific period, the setting suggestion production using the ready-to-win pattern and the production mode of the fifth step in the step-up notice By providing a case where the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is set even after the notification that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state is performed. As expected, the performance can be diversified to improve the game interest.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, It may be provided with a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, while the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern can be executed, the suggestion regarding the set value by the effect mode of the fifth step in the step-up notice may not be executed. Alternatively, while the setting suggesting effect using the ready-to-win pattern is not executed, the setting value may be suggested by the effect mode of the fifth step in the step-up notice.

Along with the step-up announcement effect, the character announcement effect, and the title announcement effect, or in place of some or all of them, the chance-up effect may be made executable. The chance-up performance is a performance in which a character appears on the image display device 5 during the ready-to-win performance, and the degree of expectation for a big hit is suggested by the content of the character's lines. In addition, the performance mode of the chance-up performance may be any performance mode that can suggest the degree of expectation for the big win to the player, and may not be the performance that suggests the degree of expectation for the big win depending on the content of the character's lines.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display start setting process. When the variable display result is a big hit, whether or not to execute a chance-up effect and the effect pattern in the case of execution is determined based on the fact that the variable display result is a big win and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加to determine. If the variable display result is a loss, whether or not to execute a chance-up effect and the effect pattern in the case of execution is determined based on the fact that the variable display result is a loss and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加to determine.

FIGS. 12-14 show setting examples of effect patterns that can be determined when executing the chance-up effect. In this setting example, four patterns CU-1 to CU-4 are prepared in advance as a plurality of determinable effect patterns when executing the chance-up effect. The pattern CU-1 is a performance pattern indicating that the degree of expectation for a big win is low (the degree of expectation for a big win: low), and the pattern CU-2 has a higher degree of expectation for a big win than the pattern CU-1 (the degree of expectation for a big win: high). It is a production pattern showing that. Pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4 are effect patterns for notifying that the variable display result is a big win. Pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4 are both effect patterns for notifying that the variable display result will be a big hit, but the effect modes are different.

FIG. 12-15(A) shows a setting example of ratios for determining whether or not to execute the chance-up effect and the effect pattern in the case of execution when the variable display result is a big win. In this determination example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, it is determined that the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 39%, and the chance-up effect is executed at a rate of 10%. 1, decides to execute the chance-up performance with the pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, and decides to execute the chance-up performance with the pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%. , decides to execute the chance-up performance in the pattern CU-4 at a rate of 1%. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 38%, and the chance-up performance is executed with the pattern CU-1 at a rate of 10%. is determined, 40% of the time it is determined that the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-2, 10% of the time the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-3, and 2% of the time. , it is determined that the chance-up effect is executed in pattern CU-4. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 37%, and the chance-up performance is executed with the pattern CU-1 at a rate of 10%. is determined, 40% of the decision is made to execute the chance-up effect with the pattern CU-2, 10% of the decision is made to execute the chance-up effect with the pattern CU-3, and the 3% is determined. , it is determined that the chance-up effect is executed in pattern CU-4. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 36%, and the chance-up performance is executed with the pattern CU-1 at a rate of 10%. is determined, 40% of the time it decides to execute the chance-up effect with the pattern CU-2, 10% of the time decides to execute the chance-up effect with the pattern CU-3, and 4% of the time. , it is determined that the chance-up effect is executed in pattern CU-4. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 35%, and the chance-up performance is executed with the pattern CU-1 at a rate of 10%. is determined, 40% of the time it is decided to execute the chance-up effect with the pattern CU-2, 10% of the time it is decided to execute the chance-up effect with the pattern CU-3, and 5% of the time. , it is determined that the chance-up effect is executed in pattern CU-4. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 34%, and the chance-up performance is executed with the pattern CU-1 at a rate of 10%. is determined, the chance-up production is decided to be executed in the pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, the chance-up production is decided to be executed in the pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%, and the rate is 6%. , it is determined that the chance-up effect is executed in pattern CU-4.

FIG. 12-15(B) shows a setting example of ratios for determining whether or not to execute the chance-up effect and the effect pattern in the case of execution when the variable display result is a loss. In this determination example, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, it is determined that the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 50%, and the chance-up effect is executed with pattern CU-1 at a rate of 40%. It decides to execute the chance-up performance with the pattern CU-2 at a rate of 10%, decides to perform the chance-up performance with the pattern CU-3 at a rate of 0%, and 0%. It is determined that the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern CU-4 at the rate of .

By setting the determined ratio as described above, among the cases where the chance-up performance is executed, when the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern CU-1, the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state is low (the expectation of the big win is low). ), when the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-2, the ratio of control to the big win game state is high (high expectation of big win). When the chance-up performance is executed in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4, the game is always controlled to a big win game state. The rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-3 is common (uniformly 10%) regardless of the set value, whereas the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-4 is the set value. is set to increase as the Therefore, the ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-3 and the total ratio of executing the pattern CU-4 are different according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, and in particular, the chance-up effect is different. The setting value is suggested by the rate at which the effect is executed in the pattern CU-4.

As in pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4, the determination ratio of the chance-up effect for notifying that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 11% when the set value is 2, 12% when the set value is 3, 13% when the set value is 4, 14% when the set value is 4, 15% when the set value is 5, and 6 is 16%, which differs according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, the ratio of execution of the chance-up performance in the performance pattern for informing that the chance-up performance is controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, and the pachinko game machine. It is set to increase as the set value set to 1 increases.

In step 66AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (chance-up effect control pattern) is selected and set as a use pattern in response to the decision to execute the chance-up effect. may Alternatively, by setting the timer value of the chance-up effect process timer, the chance-up effect may be executed according to the process table for each effect pattern. When the process table for the chance-up effect is set, the value of the chance-up effect process timer is updated each time the effect process during variable display is executed, and the effect device (image display device 5 or The chance-up effect can be executed by controlling the speakers 8L, 8R, the effect lamp 9, etc.).

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4, which is the effect pattern of the big hit notification, is executed when the chance-up effect is executed. When it is determined that it is a performance pattern for informing a big win, whether or not to execute a set value suggestion performance and the performance pattern in the case of execution are determined based on the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加.

FIGS. 12-16 show setting examples of effect patterns that can be determined when executing the set value suggesting effect. In this setting example, five effect patterns SS-1 to SS-5 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect patterns that can be determined when executing the set value suggesting effect. Pattern SS-1 suggests that the set values may be odd (eg, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 suggests that the set values may be even (eg, 2, 4, 6). pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd-numbered intermediate setting or higher (e.g., 3 or 5), and pattern SS-4 suggests that the setting value is an even-numbered intermediate setting or higher (e.g., , 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

Pattern SS-1 and pattern SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the setting value is one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that the setting value is either 5 or 6 (high setting). It is assumed that the expectation of something is low, and pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4 are determined at a high rate when the set value is either 5 or 6, so that the set value is 5 or 6. Expectations are high. Here, setting values 1 to 4 are set low and setting values 5 and 6 are high, but setting values 1 to 3 may be set low and setting values 4 to 6 may be high. , 2 may be set at a low level, set values 3 and 4 may be set at an intermediate level, and set values 5 and 6 may be set at a high level.

FIGS. 12 to 17 show setting examples of ratios for determining whether or not to execute the set value suggesting effect and the effect pattern in the case of execution. In this setting example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the non-execution of the setting value suggesting effect is determined at a rate of 90%, and the set value suggesting effect is determined at a rate of 7.15%. is executed in pattern SS-1, the set value suggestion effect is executed in pattern SS-2 at a rate of 2.35%, and the set value suggestion effect is performed at a rate of 0.36%. Decided to execute in SS-3, decided to execute setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-4 at a rate of 0.14%, set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0% decide to run. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the non-execution of the setting value suggesting effect is determined at a rate of 85%, and the set value suggesting effect is performed at a rate of 3.21% in pattern SS-1. , decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-2 at a rate of 10.73%, and set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-3 at a rate of 0.21%. decided to execute the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-4 at a rate of 0.85%, and decided to perform the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. do. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the non-execution of the set value suggesting effect is determined at a rate of 80%, and the set value suggesting effect is performed at a rate of 11.45% in pattern SS-1. , decided to execute the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-2 at a rate of 2.85%, and set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-3 at a rate of 4.28%. 1.42% to execute the set value suggesting effect in pattern SS-4, and 0% to execute the set value suggesting effect in pattern SS-5. do. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the non-execution of the setting value suggesting effect is determined at a rate of 75%, and the set value suggesting effect is performed at a rate of 3.57% in pattern SS-1. , decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-2 at a rate of 14.30%, and set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-3 at a rate of 1.78%. 5.35% of the time it decides to execute the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-4, and 0% of the time it decides to execute the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-5. do. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the non-execution of the setting value suggesting effect is determined at a rate of 70%, and the set value suggesting effect is performed at a rate of 4.28% in pattern SS-1. , decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-2 at a rate of 8.57%, and set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-3 at a rate of 10.73%. At a rate of 6.42%, it is decided to execute the set value suggesting effect in pattern SS-4, and at a rate of 0%, it is decided to execute the set value suggesting effect in pattern SS-5. do. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the non-execution of the setting value suggesting effect is determined at a rate of 65%, and the set value suggesting effect is performed at a rate of 10.00% in pattern SS-1. , decided to execute the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-2 at a rate of 5.00%, and executed the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-3 at a rate of 5.00%. 12.50% of the time, it is determined that pattern SS-4 will be used for the setting value suggestion effect, and 2.5% of the time, pattern SS-5 will be used to perform the setting value suggestion effect. to decide.

By setting the determination ratio in this way, the setting value suggesting effect is executed in pattern SS-1 or pattern SS-2, thereby suggesting that the set value is any one of 1 to 4, and setting value suggesting effect is executed in pattern SS-3 or pattern SS-4, it is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6. Also, the larger the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the higher the rate at which the execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined.

FIGS. 12-18 show the effect execution period in the variable display of super reach when executing the chance-up effect and the set value suggesting effect. The chance-up effect and the set value suggesting effect are effects that can be executed during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect during variable display of super reach. The set value suggesting performance can be executed after the chance-up performance when it is executed in a pattern CU-3 or CU-4 for notifying that the chance-up performance is controlled to a big win game state. The set value suggesting effect is an effect that suggests the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 by displaying an effect image showing one or all of a plurality of characters on the image display device 5. be. In addition, the effect mode of the set value suggesting effect may be any effect mode that can suggest the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, and does not have to be the effect mode using a plurality of characters.

In step 66AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (set value suggestive effect control pattern) is selected in response to the decision to execute the set value suggestive effect, and is used as the usage pattern. May be set. Alternatively, by setting the timer value of the set value suggesting effect process timer, it may be possible to execute the set value suggesting effect according to the process table for each effect pattern. When the process table for the set value suggestion effect is set, the value of the set value suggestion effect process timer is updated each time the variable display effect process is executed, and the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, effect lamp 9, etc.) to execute the set value suggesting effect.

When a predetermined period of time elapses after the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is started, a character is displayed in the lower part of the image display device 5 as a chance-up performance, and character information, etc. with different lines according to the performance pattern are displayed as the lines of the character. be done. In particular, when the chance-up effect is executed in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4, the result of the variable display is a big win depending on the words displayed on the image display device 5, and after the variable display ends, the game state is changed to a big win. It is notified that it is controlled.

When the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4 during the reach effect of the super reach, after a specific period has passed after the chance-up effect is completed, a plurality of setting value suggestion effects are performed. An image of one or all of the characters is displayed. For example, when the setting value suggesting effects are executed in patterns SS-1 to SS-4, different character images are displayed on the image display device 5 respectively. When the set value suggesting effect is executed in pattern SS-5 (when the set value suggesting effect is executed in the effect mode informing that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6) On the image display device 5, all characters that can be displayed on the image display device 5 are displayed when the set value suggestion effects are executed in patterns SS-1 to SS-4. As a result, the player is made to pay attention to which character image is displayed on the image display device 5 as the set value suggesting effect, and the number of character images displayed on the image display device 5 is also made to be noticed by the player. It is possible to improve the game interest. The ratio of executing the chance-up performance in the performance pattern for informing that the chance-up performance is controlled to the jackpot game state differs according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

The chance-up effect can suggest to the player the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the ratio of execution in the effect pattern for notifying that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. To improve amusement in a game by attracting the player's attention to the up performance. The set value suggesting effect can be executed after the chance-up effect is executed in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4, which is a pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4, which is a pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4, which is a pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4, which is a pattern CU-4 for informing control to the jackpot game state during the ready-to-win effect of the super reach. Since the execution ratio of the set value suggestion performance is set to be higher as the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 increases, the set value suggestion performance is executed after the chance up performance. To draw a player's attention and improve amusement in the game.

The specific suggestive effect may be a chance-up effect executed in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4, or "when a specific display result (variable display result is a big hit), an advantageous state (jackpot game In a game machine (pachinko game machine) controlled to a state), before the specific display result is displayed (derivation display), especially if it is "an effect that notifies that it is controlled to an advantageous state", that effect mode does not matter. The ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the effect pattern for notifying that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state may be lower as the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is larger. Patterns CU-3 and CU-4 of the chance-up performance may be used as the special suggestion performance, and the predetermined performance may be set value suggestion performance having a different performance mode from the chance-up performance, but the special suggestion performance and the predetermined performance may be the same. It may be an effect in the effect mode, or a special suggestive effect and a predetermined effect may be executed as a series of effects. As the predetermined effect different from the special suggestive effect and the effect mode, for example, it may be applied to an effect such as a ready-to-win effect of super reach, which is not necessarily an effect to notify that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. Of the chance-up performance and the set value suggesting performance, only the chance-up performance can be executed, so that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be suggested only by the chance-up performance.

The chance-up performance is provided as a performance pattern for notifying that two performance patterns, pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4, are controlled to a jackpot game state, and the chance-up performance is the pattern CU-3. While the execution ratio is 10% in common regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the ratio of the chance-up effect to be executed in the pattern CU-4 is set in the pachinko game machine 1. It is different depending on the set value that is set. Since the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested by the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-4, the chance-up effect is performed in pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-. The interest of the suggestion performance can be improved by making the player pay attention to which of 4 is executed.

As the performance pattern of the chance-up performance, three or more performance patterns for notifying that the game is controlled to the big win game state may be provided. Of the performance patterns for notifying that the jackpot game state is to be controlled, only the execution ratio of some performance patterns may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, or all the performances may be changed. The pattern execution ratio may be varied according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. - 特許庁After executing one performance pattern (for example, pattern CU-3) for notifying that the chance-up performance is controlled to the big win game state, the other performance notifies that the chance-up performance is controlled to the big win game state. A pattern (for example, pattern CU-4) may be executable. In this case, the content to be notified to the player may differ according to the number of times the chance-up effect is executed. For example, when the chance-up effect is executed only once in the pattern CU-3 during the variable display of 1, only the fact that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state is notified, and the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU- during the variable display of 1.例文帳に追加3 and pattern CU-4 are executed twice, in addition to notification of being controlled to the jackpot game state, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set within a predetermined range (for example, 4 to 6 range). Whether or not the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 by executing the chance-up performance with patterns CU-3 and CU-4 during the variable display of 1. It is possible to draw the player's attention to. Also, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 depending on the number of times the performance pattern for notifying that the chance-up performance is controlled to the jackpot game state is executed during the variable display of 1. It is possible to attract the player's attention to whether or not it is, and to improve the amusement of the game. The special suggestive effect may be a chance-up effect to be executed first, and the special effect may be a chance-up effect to be executed later. When the chance-up effect is executed in patterns CU-3 and CU-4 during the variable display of 1, the execution periods of both chance-up effects do not have to overlap, and the execution periods of both chance-up effects do not have to overlap. At least a portion may overlap. When the special suggestion performance and the special performance are executed within a specific period, the execution period of the special suggestion performance and the execution period of the special performance do not overlap, and the execution period of the special suggestion performance and the execution period of the special performance at least partially overlap. When the chance-up effect is executed with pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4, both chance-up effects may be executed over a plurality of variable displays. The execution of the special suggestion effect and the special effect within a specific period includes execution of both chance-up effects during one variable display and execution of both chance-up effects over a plurality of variable displays. includes both. When both chance-up effects are executed during the variable display of 1, a set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested by the number of executions of the chance-up effects executed during the variable display of 1, and a plurality of values are suggested. When both chance-up effects are executed during the variable display, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested by the number of times of execution of the chance-up effects executed during the plurality of variable displays. . The pattern CU-3 notifies that the jackpot game state is controlled and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is within a predetermined range (for example, any one of 1, 2, and 6) ), and pattern CU-4 notifies that it is controlled to a big hit game state, and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is within a range different from that of pattern CU-3. (For example, the range of 4 to 6) may be provided as an effect pattern. In this example, pattern CU-3 notifies that the set value is one of 1, 2, or 6, and pattern CU-4 notifies that the set value is one of 4 to 6. The value is determined to be 6. In this way, the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 are executed during the variable display of the chance-up effect 1, so that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be indicated more accurately. may In the case where the chance-up effect is executed twice in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1, whether or not the effect periods of both chance-up effects overlap, and whether or not both chance-up effects are performed. A setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested according to the length of overlapping performance periods.

Instead of the patterns CU-3 and CU-4, the chance-up performance can be executed a plurality of times by the pattern CU-2, which is a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win, and these chance-up performances are executed by the pattern CU-2. The suggested content may be different depending on the number of times the message is given. Specifically, the period from the start of the variable display to reaching the reach, the period from reaching the reach to the start of the reach effect of super reach, and the period from the start of the reach effect of super reach to the variable display A chance-up performance can be executed once each in a period until the end (three-time chance-up performance can be executed during one variable display), and a big win is expected when the chance-up performance is executed only once. When the chance-up performance is executed twice, it is suggested that the game state will be controlled to a big win game state, and when the chance-up performance is executed three times, it is set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加It may be set so as to notify that the current set value is within a predetermined range (for example, a range of 4 to 6). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the number of times the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-2, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the case where the suggested contents are changed according to the number of executions of the pattern CU-2, for example, the variable display result is specified at the start of the variable display, and if the variable display result is a loss or a small hit, a chance-up effect is performed. pattern CU-2 is determined to be executed only once. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a big hit, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is further specified. When the set value is any one of 1 to 5, the chance-up performance pattern CU-2 is determined to be executed once or twice, and when the set value is 6, the chance-up performance pattern CU-2 is determined. It suffices to determine the execution at -2 to be any of 1 to 3 times. In the case where the suggested contents are changed according to the number of executions of the pattern CU-2, first, the number of executions of the pattern CU-2 of the chance-up effect is determined by lottery, and the variable display result and the pachinko machine 1 are set. The number of times of execution may be re-determined according to the set value.

The ratio of executing the chance-up production in the production pattern for informing that the chance-up production is controlled to the jackpot game state is, for example, the ratio of executing the chance-up production in the pattern CU-3 and the ratio of executing the chance-up production in the pattern CU-4. It is the sum of the ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-3 and the ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-4. The ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-3 and the ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-4 may be different according to the set value. In this case, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the execution ratio of the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4, which are effect patterns for notifying that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state, is sent to the player. By suggesting this, it is possible to improve the interest of the chance-up production. A setting value change suggesting effect indicating that the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 has been changed may be made executable. In particular, when the setting value change suggesting effect is executed on the day after the low setting value is suggested by the chance-up effect or the like in the pachinko game machine 1, a high setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1 for the player. Since it is possible to make the player expect that the game is being played, the game of the player can be promoted. The performance period of the set value suggestion performance may be set longer than the performance period of the chance-up performance. By doing so, as evidence that the game has been played on the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the high setting value is set, the period during which the player shoots an image of the setting value suggesting effect with a mobile terminal such as a smartphone is shortened. can be secured. In addition, in the case where the period for the player to take the image of the set value suggesting effect is secured by setting the effect period of the set value suggesting effect longer than the effect period of the chance up effect in this way, the chance up is further increased. After the performance is executed in the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4, by making it possible to execute the performance suggesting that the set value suggesting performance is executed, the player who recognizes the performance can suggest the set value. The mobile terminal may be prepared before the performance starts. Pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4 may be determined as the performance pattern of the chance-up performance only when the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is determined in the variable special figure.

The special suggestion effect may be an effect (a so-called all-rotation ready-to-win effect) in which decorative symbols are variably displayed in combination with a big hit. When it is possible to execute the pseudo-continuous effect of repeating the temporary stop and re-variable display of the decoration pattern, the temporary stop and the re-variable display of the decorative pattern up to the upper limit number of times as the pseudo-continuous effect may be the special suggestive effect. When it is possible to execute the pending display notice effect of notifying the variable display result in the display mode of the pending memory display for the variable display that has not been executed yet, the display of the pending memory display in gold, rainbow color, etc. is a special suggestive effect. may be In addition, light emission in the form of notifying the big win of the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R notifying the big win, operation of a specific movable body, or a combination of some or all of these are specially suggested. It can also be used as a performance. When it is possible to execute all-rotation reach, pseudo-continuous effect, holding memory display effect, light emission of game effect lamp 9, sound output from speakers 8 and 8R, movement of movable body, etc., which are special suggestive effects, these special Different setting values may be suggested by combining suggestive effects and changing the effect mode of the special suggestive effect to be executed later. For example, after it is notified that the temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative symbols are executed up to the upper limit number of times (for example, 4 times) as a pseudo-continuous effect and the control to the jackpot game state is performed, the all-rotation ready-to-win effect is executed. , as this all-rotation ready-to-reach production, if the direction of variable display of the decorative pattern is directed downward, it is notified that the set value is one of 1 to 3, and as this all-rotation ready-to-win production, the variable display of the decorative pattern is notified. If the direction is from the left to the right, it is notified that the set value is any one of 4 to 6, and as this all-rotation ready-to-win performance, the variable display direction of the decorative pattern is displayed on the image display device as seen from the player. The fact that the set value is 6 may be notified from the far side of 5 toward the near side. Alternatively, after the game effect lamp 9 emits rainbow color light at the start of the variable display to inform that the jackpot game state is controlled, if the melody A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the set value is 1 to 1. 3, and if melody B is output from speakers 8L and 8R, it is notified that the set value is any of 4 to 6, and melody C is output from speakers 8L and 8R. For example, it may be notified that the set value is 6. Alternatively, after it is informed that the variable display result corresponding to the pending memory display becomes a big win by displaying the pending memory display in rainbow color (that the variable display result is controlled to the big winning game state after the end of the variable display), this big win is performed. By the time the variable display is completed, the movable body A operates to notify that the set value is one of 1 to 3, and the movable body B operates before the variable display that becomes the big hit is completed. By doing so, it is notified that the set value is any one of 4 to 6, and the set value is 6 by the operation of both the movable body A and the movable body B until the variable display for the big hit ends. may be notified.

When the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be suggested in both the chance-up performance and the set-value suggestion performance, the set values suggested in the chance-up performance and the set values suggested in the set-value suggestion performance are individually set. , it is conceivable that the contents of these suggestions do not match depending on the presentation mode of the chance-up presentation and the set value suggestion presentation. Therefore, for example, when the execution of pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4 is not determined, when the set value is not suggested in the chance-up effect, the set value may be suggested only by the set value suggestion effect. Only when it is decided not to execute the setting value suggesting effect, the setting value may be suggested in the chance-up effect, such as deciding to execute pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4. A store clerk or the like of a game hall can change whether or not to suggest a setting value as a chance-up effect, and the ratio of execution/non-execution of the setting value suggesting effect, by using a performance adjustment function or the like provided in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加good too.

In addition to the chance-up performance, the degree of expectation for a big win may be suggested by any performance such as a pseudo-continuous performance or a look-ahead notice performance, and the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested. The feature part 66AK can be applied to an arbitrary effect as long as the effect is capable of suggesting the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 after suggesting the control of the jackpot game state during execution of the variable display. can. For example, in the case of executing an arbitrary effect, after suggesting the control of the jackpot game state, the suggestion about the control of the jackpot game state is continued, and the suggestion about the control of the jackpot game state is continued. In addition, it is sufficient if it includes the case of suggesting the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1. Alternatively, in the case of executing an arbitrary performance, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the big win game state, when the suggestion ends, or when the suggestion regarding the control of the big win game state is continued and the pachinko game machine 1 is set. It may also include cases where suggestions regarding values are made.

The suggestion about the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, suggesting whether or not the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. . For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different determination ratios depending on whether the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 have been changed. Alternatively, the outer frame display pattern may include a pattern with a different determination ratio depending on whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the effect is made so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed by suggesting the effect mode of the pattern determined at a high rate. can be diversified to improve amusement.

Part or all of the specific period, or part or all of the specific period after the specific timing may be included in the period after the end of the variable display. For example, during execution of the variable display, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state may be made, while suggestions regarding the set values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the pachinko machine executes a big hit start effect (fanfare effect) and a big hit effect (such as a effect corresponding to the first and second rounds). A setting value of 1 may be suggested. There may be a case where the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested without suggesting the control of the jackpot game state.

In place of part or all of the suggestion about the control of the big win game state, or together with part or all of the suggestion about the control of the big win game state, a suggestion about control of a state advantageous to the player different from the big win game state is provided. can be anything. For example, it may suggest a variable probability state to be controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as the advantageous state, a suggestion may be made according to whether or not control is to be performed regarding a state in which an arbitrary game value that is advantageous to the player is awarded.

Various restrictions may be based on arbitrary ranges and limits as long as they do not deviate from the objectives, problems to be solved, and other gist of the present invention. The range of restrictions may be any condition that makes the presence or absence, ratio, or other amount of processing, control, or execution of an action different. Any content that is different (for example, whether to stop or reduce, degree of reduction, etc.) may be used.

(Description of Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 66AK)
A gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is advantageous to the player, for example, can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, and a plurality of set values that differ in the degree of advantage for the player are, for example, 1 to 6. Can be set to any set value among such as, for example, setting means such as the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the set value change process in step S6A, and a suggestive effect can be executed over a specific period, for example An image display device 5, an effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120 is provided, and the effect execution means is, for example, as shown in FIG. After suggesting the control of the advantageous state, as an effect that can be executed after a specific timing, for example, when the ready-to-win pattern becomes a decoration pattern corresponding to a number other than 7, the suggestion about the control of the advantageous state is continued. A first suggestion performance to be performed, and a second suggestion performance to continue to suggest the control of the advantageous state and to suggest the setting of the setting means, such as when the ready-to-win pattern becomes a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7. Of these, any one of the suggestion effects can be executed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game by enabling execution of either the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect after the specific timing.

Alternatively, in a gaming machine such as pachinko gaming machine 1, which is advantageous to the player and can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state, for example, 1 6 etc. can be set, for example, setting means such as the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the set value change process in step S6A, and a suggestive effect can be executed over a specific period , for example, an image display device 5, and an effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120, and the effect execution means, for example, as shown in FIGS. After that, for example, when the number of steps of the step-up notice is less than 5, the first suggestion effect that ends the suggestion, and for example, when the step-up notice of the number of steps is 5, etc., can be executed after a specific timing. As the effect, any one of the second suggestive effect of continuously suggesting the control of the advantageous state and suggesting the setting of the setting means can be executed.
According to such a configuration, by making it possible to execute either the first suggestion performance in which the suggestion is made until the specific timing and then ends, or the second suggestion performance in which the suggestion is made even after the specific timing, the amusement of the game can be improved. can be done.

The specific period may be included in the execution period of variable display in which at least the ready-to-win effect can be executed, such as the period after timing T2, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by increasing the degree of attention to the presentation.

The reach mode of the variable display includes a plurality of types of reach modes with different ratios of being controlled in an advantageous state, such as a reach pattern with decorative patterns corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7, and the effect execution means is the reach of the variable display. After becoming a mode, the reach mode may be changed to a specific mode, for example, the symbol display color may be copper, silver, gold, or the like.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by increasing the degree of attention to the presentation.

After the specific timing, the effect executing means may be capable of executing different forms of effects according to the settings of the setting means, such as effects corresponding to the patterns RE-0 to RE-3, which are setting suggestion patterns. .
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by increasing the degree of attention to the presentation.

The performance executing means changes the performance mode step by step from one stage to a plurality of stages such as a step-up notice performance, and as the number of stages in which the performance mode is changed increases, the rate of being controlled to an advantageous state increases. It may be possible to execute a suggestive effect.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by increasing the degree of attention to the presentation.

The plurality of stages include, for example, the 4th step of the step-up notice effect, which is an advantageous state notification step for notifying that the control is in an advantageous state, and the 5th step of the step-up notice effect, for example, which indicates the setting of the setting means. After the effect execution means changes the effect mode to the advantageous state notification stage, the effect execution means can change the effect mode to the setting suggestion stage after a specific timing. As shown at 12-11, the setting suggestion stage may have a longer execution period than the advantage notification stage.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by increasing the degree of attention to the presentation.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
The configuration regarding the characteristic portion 66AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of the configuration regarding other characteristic portions.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Frame for game machine 4A, 4B Special symbol display device 5 Image display device 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker , 9 game effect lamp, 10 general winning opening, 11 main board, 12
Effect control board, 13 Sound control board, 14 Lamp control board, 15 Relay board, 20 Normal symbol display, 21 Gate switch, 22A, 22B Start switch, 23 Count switch, 30 Hitting operation handle, 31A Stick controller, 31B Push Button, 32 movable body, 100 game control microcomputer, 101,121 ROM, 102,122 RAM, 103 CPU, 104,124 random number circuit, 105,125 I/O, 120 effect control CPU, 123 display control section.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state after executing a variable display based on the establishment of a start condition and can display a specific display corresponding to the variable display,
a change effect executing means for changing a display mode of a specific display, which is a pre-reading announcement effect determined when a start condition is satisfied before the start condition is satisfied;
a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect that is the pre-reading preview effect;
a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect, which is the pre-reading preview effect,
When the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not being executed,
When the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the special effect is being executed,
It is easier to be controlled to the advantageous state when the special effect is executed than when the specific effect is executed,
The specific effect can be started after the special effect is started ,
The display mode of the specific display whose display mode is changed to the predetermined mode when the specific effect is executed is more likely to change than the specific display whose display mode is changed to the predetermined mode when the specific effect is not executed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images